Reference Guide

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsComputer equipmentForce10 Z9000

Dell Configuration Guide for the Z9000

System

9.4(0.0)

Summary of content (932 pages)

PAGE 1
Dell Configuration Guide for the Z9000 System 9.4(0.
PAGE 2
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2014 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws.
PAGE 3
Contents 1 About this Guide...................................................................................................... 31 Audience.............................................................................................................................................. 31 Conventions.........................................................................................................................................31 Related Documents.........................................................
PAGE 4
Enabling Software Features on Devices Using a Command Option................................................ 53 View Command History......................................................................................................................54 Upgrading Dell Networking OS.......................................................................................................... 54 4 Management............................................................................................................
PAGE 5
802.1X........................................................................................................................ 75 The Port-Authentication Process....................................................................................................... 76 EAP over RADIUS........................................................................................................................... 78 Configuring 802.1X..................................................................................
PAGE 6
Route Maps........................................................................................................................................ 113 Implementation Information....................................................................................................... 113 Important Points to Remember........................................................................................................ 113 Configuration Task List for Route Maps....................................................
PAGE 7
Troubleshooting BFD.................................................................................................................. 163 9 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4)......................................................... 165 Autonomous Systems (AS)................................................................................................................165 Sessions and Peers....................................................................................................................
PAGE 8
Filtering Routes with Community Lists...................................................................................... 205 Manipulating the COMMUNITY Attribute.................................................................................. 205 Changing MED Attributes........................................................................................................... 207 Changing the LOCAL_PREFERENCE Attribute..........................................................................
PAGE 9
Show Commands....................................................................................................................... 248 12 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).......................................... 251 DHCP Packet Format and Options...................................................................................................251 Assign an IP Address using DHCP....................................................................................................
PAGE 10
Configuration Tasks.......................................................................................................................... 277 Preparing the System........................................................................................................................ 277 Enabling FIPS Mode.......................................................................................................................... 278 Generating Host-Keys........................................................
PAGE 11
Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces.................................................................................................... 305 Selecting an IGMP Version............................................................................................................... 305 Viewing IGMP Groups...................................................................................................................... 306 Adjusting Timers.............................................................................
PAGE 12
Egress Interface Selection (EIS)........................................................................................................ 327 Important Points to Remember................................................................................................. 328 Configuring EIS........................................................................................................................... 328 Management Interfaces.............................................................................
PAGE 13
Port-Pipes..........................................................................................................................................352 Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces........................................................................................ 352 Setting the Speed and Duplex Mode of Ethernet Interfaces.....................................................353 Set Auto-Negotiation Options.......................................................................................
PAGE 14
Configure UDP Helper................................................................................................................ 374 Important Points to Remember..................................................................................................375 Enabling UDP Helper........................................................................................................................ 375 Configuring a Broadcast Address......................................................................
PAGE 15
Interface Support........................................................................................................................ 401 Adjacencies..................................................................................................................................401 Graceful Restart................................................................................................................................ 401 Timers......................................................................
PAGE 16
Manage the MAC Address Table...................................................................................................... 447 Clearing the MAC Address Table................................................................................................447 Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries..............................................................................447 Configuring a Static MAC Address...........................................................................................
PAGE 17
Configuring LLDPDU Intervals..........................................................................................................477 Configuring Transmit and Receive Mode........................................................................................ 477 Configuring a Time to Live............................................................................................................... 478 Debugging LLDP........................................................................................
PAGE 18
28 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)..................................................... 517 Protocol Overview.............................................................................................................................517 Spanning Tree Variations.................................................................................................................. 518 Implementation Information..................................................................................................
PAGE 19
Multi-Process OSPFv2 (IPv4 only)...............................................................................................551 RFC-2328 Compliant OSPF Flooding........................................................................................ 552 OSPF ACK Packing...................................................................................................................... 553 Setting OSPF Adjacency with Cisco Routers............................................................................
PAGE 20
Configuring S,G Expiry Timers......................................................................................................... 600 Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point........................................................................................... 602 Overriding Bootstrap Router Updates....................................................................................... 602 Configuring a Designated Router..................................................................................
PAGE 21
36 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+).........................................................635 Protocol Overview............................................................................................................................ 635 Implementation Information............................................................................................................636 Configure Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus........................................................................................
PAGE 22
Protocol Overview............................................................................................................................669 RIPv1............................................................................................................................................ 669 RIPv2............................................................................................................................................669 Implementation Information..........................................
PAGE 23
Configuration Task List for Privilege Levels............................................................................... 705 RADIUS...............................................................................................................................................710 RADIUS Authentication................................................................................................................ 711 Configuration Task List for RADIUS...........................................................
PAGE 24
44 sFlow..................................................................................................................... 745 Overview............................................................................................................................................745 Implementation Information............................................................................................................ 745 Important Points to Remember...............................................................
PAGE 25
Manage VLANs using SNMP............................................................................................................. 769 Creating a VLAN.......................................................................................................................... 769 Assigning a VLAN Alias................................................................................................................ 770 Displaying the Ports in a VLAN................................................................
PAGE 26
Configure the Network Time Protocol.......................................................................................797 Enabling NTP............................................................................................................................... 797 Setting the Hardware Clock with the Time Derived from NTP................................................. 797 Configuring NTP Broadcasts......................................................................................................
PAGE 27
VLT Terminology...............................................................................................................................823 Configure Virtual Link Trunking....................................................................................................... 824 Important Points to Remember................................................................................................. 824 Configuration Notes..............................................................................
PAGE 28
Proxy Gateway in VLT Domains.......................................................................................................869 LLDP organizational TLV for proxy gateway.............................................................................. 871 Sample Configuration Scenario for VLT Proxy Gateway...........................................................872 Configuring an LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway.......................................................................................
PAGE 29
Mini Core Dumps.............................................................................................................................. 916 Example of a Mini Core Text File................................................................................................ 916 Enabling TCP Dumps........................................................................................................................ 916 56 Standards Compliance..................................................................
PAGE 30
PAGE 31
About this Guide 1 This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. This guide supports the Z9000 platform. The Z9000 platform is available with Dell Networking OS version 8.3.11.1 and beyond. Though this guide contains information on protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference. This guide is a reference for configuring protocols on Dell Networking systems.
PAGE 32
PAGE 33
Configuration Fundamentals 2 The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for the Z9000, S6000, S4810, and S4820T except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
PAGE 34
• • • EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level. Only a limited selection of commands is available, notably the show commands, which allow you to view system information. EXEC Privilege mode has commands to view configurations, clear counters, manage configuration files, run diagnostics, and enable or disable debug operations. The privilege level is 15, which is unrestricted.
PAGE 35
VIRTUAL TERMINAL LLDP LLDP MANAGEMENT INTERFACE MONITOR SESSION MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE OPENFLOW INSTANCE PVST PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP PREFIX-LIST PRIORITY-GROUP PROTOCOL GVRP QOS POLICY RSTP ROUTE-MAP ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP GRUB Navigating CLI Modes The Dell Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode.
PAGE 36
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command AS-PATH ACL Dell(config-as-path)# ip as-path access-list Gigabit Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-gi-0/0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) 10 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-te-0/1–2)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Interface Group Dell(conf-if-group)# interface(INTERFACE modes) Interface Range Dell(conf-if-range)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Loopback Interface Dell(conf-if-lo-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Management Ethernet Interface Dell(conf
PAGE 37
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command RAPID SPANNING TREE Dell(config-rstp)# protocol spanning-tree rstp REDIRECT Dell(conf-redirect-list)# ip redirect-list ROUTE-MAP Dell(config-route-map)# route-map ROUTER BGP Dell(conf-router_bgp)# router bgp BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY Dell(conf-router_bgp_af)# address-family {ipv4 multicast | ipv6 unicast} (for IPv4) (ROUTER BGP Mode) Dell(confrouterZ_bgpv6_af)# (for IPv6) ROUTER ISIS Dell(conf-router_isis)# router isis ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY Dell(conf-router
PAGE 38
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command LLDP MANAGEMENT INTERFACE Dell(conf-lldp-mgmtIf)# management-interface (LLDP Mode) LINE Dell(config-line-console) or Dell(config-line-vty) line console orline vty MONITOR SESSION Dell(conf-mon-sesssessionID)# monitor session OPENFLOW INSTANCE Dell(conf-of-instance-ofid)# openflow of-instance PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVERGROUP Dell(conf-po-failovergrp)# port-channel failovergroup PRIORITY GROUP Dell(conf-pg)# priority-group PROTOCOL GVRP Dell(config-gvrp)#
PAGE 39
2 3 4 5 6 7 online not present not present online not present not present online E48TB E48TB 1-1-463 48 online E48VB E48VB 1-1-463 48 Undoing Commands When you enter a command, the command line is added to the running configuration file (runningconfig). To disable a command and remove it from the running-config, enter the no command, then the original command. For example, to delete an IP address configured on an interface, use the no ip address ip-address command.
PAGE 40
clock Dell(conf)#cl • Enter [space]? after a keyword lists all of the keywords that can follow the specified keyword. Dell(conf)#clock ? summer-time Configure summer (daylight savings) time timezone Configure time zone Dell(conf)#clock Entering and Editing Commands Notes for entering commands. • The CLI is not case-sensitive. • You can enter partial CLI keywords. – Enter the minimum number of letters to uniquely identify a command.
PAGE 41
Short-Cut Key Combination Action Esc B Moves the cursor back one word. Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word. Esc D Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the word. Command History Dell Networking OS maintains a history of previously-entered commands for each mode. For example: • When you are in EXEC mode, the UP and DOWN arrow keys display the previously-entered EXEC mode commands.
PAGE 42
----------------------------------------------------2 not present 3 not present 4 not present 5 not present 6 not present The find keyword displays the output of the show command beginning from the first occurrence of specified text. The following example shows this command used in combination with the show linecard all command.
PAGE 43
Getting Started 3 This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) during which the route processor module (RPM), switch fabric module (SFM), and line card status light emitting diodes (LEDs) blink green. The system then loads the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption.
PAGE 44
Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter. 1. Install an RJ-45 copper cable into the console port.Use a rollover (crossover) cable to connect the S4810 console port to a terminal server. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the DTE terminal server. 3.
PAGE 45
Entering CLI commands Using an SSH Connection You can run CLI commands by entering any one of the following syntax to connect to a switch using the preconfigured user credentials using SSH: ssh username@hostname or echo | ssh admin@hostname The SSH server transmits the terminal commands to the CLI shell and the results are displayed on the screen non-interactively.
PAGE 46
Default Configuration A version of Dell Networking OS is pre-loaded onto the chassis; however, the system is not configured when you power up for the first time (except for the default hostname, which is Dell). You must configure the system using the CLI. Configuring a Host Name The host name appears in the prompt. The default host name is Dell. • Host names must start with a letter and end with a letter or digit. • Characters within the string can be letters, digits, and hyphens.
PAGE 47
Configure the Management Port IP Address To access the system remotely, assign IP addresses to the management ports. NOTE: Assign different IP addresses to each RPM’s management port. 1. Enter INTERFACE mode for the Management port. CONFIGURATION mode interface ManagementEthernet slot/port 2. • slot: the range is from 0 to 1. • port: the range is 0. Assign an IP address to the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address/mask 3. • ip-address: an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D).
PAGE 48
* 0 is for inputting the password in clear text. * 7 is for inputting a password that is already encrypted using a Type 7 hash. Obtaining the encrypted password from the configuration of another Dell Networking system. Configuring the Enable Password Access EXEC Privilege mode using the enable command. EXEC Privilege mode is unrestricted by default. Configure a password as a basic security measure.
PAGE 49
Table 3.
PAGE 50
Save the Running-Configuration The running-configuration contains the current system configuration. Dell Networking recommends coping your running-configuration to the startup-configuration. The system uses the startup-configuration during boot-up to configure the system. The startupconfiguration is stored in the internal flash on the primary RPM by default, but it can be saved onto an external flash (on an RPM) or a remote server.
PAGE 51
situation, overwrite the new startup-configuration with the original one using the copy startupconfig.bak startup-config command. Configure the Overload Bit for a Startup Scenario For information about setting the router overload bit for a specific period of time after a switch reload is implemented, refer to the Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) section in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 52
11 drw8192 12 -rw7276 13 -rw7341 14 -rw- 27674906 15 -rw- 27674906 --More-- Jan Jul Jul Jul Jul 01 20 20 06 06 1980 2007 2007 2007 2007 00:18:28 01:52:40 15:34:46 19:52:22 02:23:22 diag startup-config.
PAGE 53
To change the default directory, use the following command. • Change the default directory. EXEC Privilege mode cd directory In the following example, the default storage location is changed to the external Flash of the primary RPM. File management commands then apply to the external Flash rather than the internal Flash. The bold lines show that no file system is specified and that the file is saved to an external flash.
PAGE 54
Based on whether VRF feature is identified as supported in the Feature Configuration file, configuration command feature vrf becomes available for usage. This command will be stored in running-configuration and will precede all other VRF-related configurations. NOTE: The MXL and Z9000 platforms currently do not support VRF. These platforms support only the management and default VRFs, which are available by default. As a result, the feature vrf command is not available for these platforms.
PAGE 55
Management 4 Management is supported on the Z9000 platform. This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell Networking system. Configuring Privilege Levels Privilege levels restrict access to commands based on user or terminal line. There are 16 privilege levels, of which three are pre-defined. The default privilege level is 1. Level Description Level 0 Access to the system begins at EXEC mode, and EXEC mode commands are limited to enable, disable, and exit.
PAGE 56
Allowing Access to CONFIGURATION Mode Commands To allow access to CONFIGURATION mode, use the privilege exec level level configure command from CONFIGURATION mode. A user that enters CONFIGURATION mode remains at his privilege level and has access to only two commands, end and exit. You must individually specify each CONFIGURATION mode command you want to allow access to using the privilege configure level level command.
PAGE 57
• Allow access to a CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode command. CONFIGURATION mode privilege {configure |interface | line | route-map | router} level level {command ||...
PAGE 58
aux Auxiliary line console Primary terminal line vty Virtual terminal Dell(conf)#line vty 0 Dell(config-line-vty)#? exit Exit from line configuration mode Dell(config-line-vty)# Dell(conf)#interface group ? fortyGigE FortyGigabit Ethernet interface gigabitethernet GigabitEthernet interface IEEE 802.
PAGE 59
• Disable logging to terminal lines. CONFIGURATION mode • no logging monitor Disable console logging. CONFIGURATION mode no logging console Log Messages in the Internal Buffer All error messages, except those beginning with %BOOTUP (Message), are log in the internal buffer.
PAGE 60
CONFIGURATION mode logging {ip-address | hostname} Configuring a UNIX System as a Syslog Server To configure a UNIX System as a syslog server, use the following command. • Configure a UNIX system as a syslog server by adding the following lines to /etc/syslog.conf on the UNIX system and assigning write permissions to the file. – Add line on a 4.1 BSD UNIX system. local7.debugging /var/log/ftos.log – Add line on a 5.7 SunOS UNIX system. local7.debugging /var/adm/ftos.
PAGE 61
• NOTE: When you decrease the buffer size, Dell Networking OS deletes all messages stored in the buffer. Increasing the buffer size does not affect messages in the buffer. Specify the number of messages that Dell Networking OS saves to its logging history table. CONFIGURATION mode logging history size size To view the logging buffer and configuration, use the show logging command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Display the Logging Buffer and the Logging Configuration.
PAGE 62
To view any changes made, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Configure a UNIX Logging Facility Level. Configuring a UNIX Logging Facility Level You can save system log messages with a UNIX system logging facility. To configure a UNIX logging facility level, use the following command. • Specify one of the following parameters.
PAGE 63
logging logging logging logging Dell# trap debugging facility user source-interface Loopback 0 10.10.10.4 Synchronizing Log Messages You can configure Dell Networking OS to filter and consolidate the system messages for a specific line by synchronizing the message output. Only the messages with a severity at or below the set level appear. This feature works on the terminal and console connections available on the system. 1. Enter LINE mode.
PAGE 64
– uptime: To view time since last boot. If you do not specify a parameter, Dell Networking OS configures uptime. To view the configuration, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC privilege mode. To disable time stamping on syslog messages, use the no service timestamps [log | debug] command. File Transfer Services With Dell Networking OS, you can configure the system to transfer files over the network using the file transfer protocol (FTP).
PAGE 65
CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server topdir dir • The default is the internal flash directory. Specify a user name for all FTP users and configure either a plain text or encrypted password. CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server username username password [encryption-type] password Configure the following optional and required parameters: – username: enter a text string. – encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. – password: enter a text string.
PAGE 66
To view the FTP configuration, use the show running-config ftp command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Enable FTP Server. Terminal Lines You can access the system remotely and restrict access to the system by creating user profiles. Terminal lines on the system provide different means of accessing the system. The console line (console) connects you through the console port in the route processor modules (RPMs). The virtual terminal lines (VTYs) connect you through Telnet to the system.
PAGE 67
enable Prompt for the enable password. line Prompt for the password you assigned to the terminal line. Configure a password for the terminal line to which you assign a method list that contains the line authentication method. Configure a password using the password command from LINE mode. local Prompt for the system username and password. none Do not authenticate the user. radius Prompt for a username and password and use a RADIUS server to authenticate.
PAGE 68
• Set the number of minutes and seconds. The default is 10 minutes on the console and 30 minutes on VTY. Disable EXEC time out by setting the time-out period to 0. LINE mode • exec-timeout minutes [seconds] Return to the default time-out values. LINE mode no exec-timeout Example of Setting the Time Out Period for EXEC Privilege Mode The following example shows how to set the time-out period and how to view the configuration using the show config command from LINE mode.
PAGE 69
Login: admin Password: Dell>exit Dell#telnet 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2201 Trying 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2201... Connected to 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2201. Exit character is '^]'. FreeBSD/i386 (freebsd2.force10networks.com) (ttyp1) login: admin Dell# Lock CONFIGURATION Mode Dell Networking OS allows multiple users to make configurations at the same time. You can lock CONFIGURATION mode so that only one user can be in CONFIGURATION mode at any time (Message 2).
PAGE 70
NOTE: The CONFIGURATION mode lock corresponds to a VTY session, not a user. Therefore, if you configure a lock and then exit CONFIGURATION mode, and another user enters CONFIGURATION mode, when you attempt to re-enter CONFIGURATION mode, you are denied access even though you are the one that configured the lock. NOTE: If your session times out and you return to EXEC mode, the CONFIGURATION mode lock is unconfigured.
PAGE 71
10. Set the new authentication parameters. The remainder of the previous configuration is preserved. no enable password enable password [newpassword] exit 11. Save the running-config to the startup-config in flash by default. write-mem 12. Save the running-config. EXEC Privilege mode copy running-config startup-config Recovering from a Forgotten Enable Password on the Z9000 Use the following commands if you forget the enable password. 1. Log onto the system using the console. 2.
PAGE 72
Recovering from a Failed Start on the Z9000 System A system that does not start correctly might be attempting to boot from a corrupted Dell Networking OS image or from a mis-specified location. In this case, you can restart the system and interrupt the boot process to point the system to another boot location. Use the set command, as described in the following steps.
PAGE 73
Restoring the Factory Default Settings Restoring the factory-default settings deletes the existing NVRAM settings, startup configuration, and all configured settings such as, stacking or fanout. Z9000MXL Switch To restore the factory default settings, use the restore factory-defaults stack-unit {0-5 | all} {clear-all | nvram} command in EXEC Privilege mode. CAUTION: There is no undo for this command.
PAGE 74
PAGE 75
802.1X 5 802.1X is supported on the Z9000 platform. 802.1X is a method of port security. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity can be verified (through a username and password, for example). This feature is named for its IEEE specification. 802.
PAGE 76
Figure 3. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS The authentication process involves three devices: • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. • The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network.
PAGE 77
3. The authenticator decapsulates the EAP response from the EAPOL frame, encapsulates it in a RADIUS Access-Request frame and forwards the frame to the authentication server. 4. The authentication server replies with an Access-Challenge frame. The Access-Challenge frame requests that the supplicant prove that it is who it claims to be, using a specified method (an EAPMethod). The challenge is translated and forwarded to the supplicant by the authenticator. 5.
PAGE 78
EAP over RADIUS 802.1X uses RADIUS to shuttle EAP packets between the authenticator and the authentication server, as defined in RFC 3579. EAP messages are encapsulated in RADIUS packets as a type of attribute in Type, Length, Value (TLV) format. The Type value for EAP messages is 79. Figure 5. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1 Support Dell Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.
PAGE 79
Important Points to Remember • Dell Networking OS supports 802.1X with EAP-MD5, EAP-OTP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAPv0, PEAPv1, and MS-CHAPv2 with PEAP. • All platforms support only RADIUS as the authentication server. • If the primary RADIUS server becomes unresponsive, the authenticator begins using a secondary RADIUS server, if configured. • 802.1X is not supported on port-channels or port-channel members. 802.
PAGE 80
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 6. 802.1X Enabled 1. Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2. Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3. Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication 80 802.
PAGE 81
Example of Verifying that 802.1X is Enabled Globally Example of Verifying 802.1X is Enabled on an Interface Verify that 802.1X is enabled globally and at the interface level using the show running-config | find dot1x command from EXEC Privilege mode. The bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled. Dell#show running-config | find dot1x dot1x authentication ! [output omitted] ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! Dell# View 802.
PAGE 82
NOTE: There are several reasons why the supplicant might fail to respond; for example, the supplicant might have been booting when the request arrived or there might be a physical layer problem. To configure re-transmissions, use the following commands. • Configure the amount of time that the authenticator waits before re-transmitting an EAP Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x tx-period number The range is from 1 to 65535 (1 year) • The default is 30.
PAGE 83
• re-transmits an EAP Request Identity frame The bold lines show the new re-transmit interval, new quiet period, and new maximum re-transmissions. FTOS(conf-if-range-Te-0/0)#dot1x tx-period 90 FTOS(conf-if-range-Te-0/0)#dot1x max-eap-req 10 FTOS(conf-if-range-Te-0/0)#dot1x quiet-period 120 FTOS#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 802.
PAGE 84
802.
PAGE 85
----------------------------Dot1x Status: Enable Port Control: FORCE_AUTHORIZED Port Auth Status: UNAUTHORIZED Re-Authentication: Enable Untagged VLAN id: None Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 10 Supplicant Timeout: 30 seconds Server Timeout: 30 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 7200 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: SINGLE_HOST Auth PAE State: Initialize Backend State: Initialize Auth PAE State: Initialize Backend State: Initialize Configuring Timeouts If the supplicant or the authenti
PAGE 86
Re-Authentication: Disable Untagged VLAN id: None Guest VLAN: Disable Guest VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail VLAN: Disable Auth-Fail VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: NONE Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 10 Supplicant Timeout: 15 seconds Server Timeout: 15 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 7200 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Enter the tasks the user should do after finishing this task (optional).
PAGE 87
Figure 7. Dynamic VLAN Assignment 1. Configure 8021.x globally (refer to Enabling 802.1X) along with relevant RADIUS server configurations (refer to the illustration inDynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). 2. Make the interface a switchport so that it can be assigned to a VLAN. 3. Create the VLAN to which the interface will be assigned. 4. Connect the supplicant to the port configured for 802.1X. 5.
PAGE 88
If the supplicant fails authentication, the authenticator typically does not enable the port. In some cases this behavior is not appropriate. External users of an enterprise network, for example, might not be able to be authenticated, but still need access to the network. Also, some dumb-terminals, such as network printers, do not have 802.1X capability and therefore cannot authenticate themselves.
PAGE 89
Example of Configuring Maximum Authentication Attempts Example of Viewing Configured Authentication Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#dot1x guest-vlan 200 Dell(conf-if-Te 2/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 switchport dot1x authentication dot1x guest-vlan 200 no shutdown Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)# Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#dot1x auth-fail-vlan 100 max-attempts 5 Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 switchport dot1x authentication dot1x guest-vlan 200 dot1x auth-fail-vlan 100 max-atte
PAGE 90
PAGE 91
Access Control Lists (ACLs) 6 This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. • Access control lists (ACLs), Ingress IP and MAC ACLs , and Egress IP and MAC ACLs are supported on the Z9000 platform. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
PAGE 92
• Port/VLAN based IMPLICIT DENY Rules • VRF based PERMIT/DENY Rules • VRF based IMPLICIT DENY Rules NOTE: In order for the VRF ACLs to take effect, ACLs configured in the Layer 3 CAM region must have an implicit-permit option. You can use the ip access-group command to configure VRF-aware ACLs on interfaces. Using the ip access-group command, in addition to a range of VLANs, you can also specify a range of VRFs as input for configuring ACLs on interfaces. The VRF range is from 1 to 63.
PAGE 93
• CAM Optimization User Configurable CAM Allocation User configurable CAM allocations are supported on the Z9000 platform. Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs by using the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode. The CAM space is allotted in filter processor (FP) blocks. The total space allocated must equal 13 FP blocks. (There are 16 FP blocks, but System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated.) Enter the ipv6acl allocation as a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).
PAGE 94
Implementing ACLs on Dell Networking OS You can assign one IP ACL per interface with Dell Networking OS. If you do not assign an IP ACL to an interface, it is not used by the software in any other capacity. The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation.
PAGE 95
closer to 0) before rules with higher-order numbers so that packets are matched as you intended. By default, all ACL rules have an order of 255. Example of the order Keyword to Determine ACL Sequence Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard acl1 Dell(config-std-nacl)#permit 20.0.0.0/8 Dell(config-std-nacl)#exit Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard acl2 Dell(config-std-nacl)#permit 20.1.1.
PAGE 96
Example of Permitting All Packets on an Interface Example of Denying Second and Subsequent Fragments The following configuration permits all packets (both fragmented and non-fragmented) with destination IP 10.1.1.1. The second rule does not get hit at all. Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended ABC Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#permit ip any 10.1.1.1/32FTOS(conf-ext-nacl)#deny ip any 10.1.1.1./32 fragments Dell(conf-ext-nacl) To deny the second/subsequent fragments, use the same rules in a different order.
PAGE 97
Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#permit tcp host 10.1.1.1 any fragment Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#deny ip any any fragment Dell(conf-ext-nacl) To log all the packets denied and to override the implicit deny rule and the implicit permit rule for TCP/ UDP fragments, use a configuration similar to the following.
PAGE 98
seq 50 deny 10.10.0.0 /16 Dell# The following example shows how the seq command orders the filters according to the sequence number assigned. In the example, filter 25 was configured before filter 15, but the show config command displays the filters in the correct order. Dell(config-std-nacl)#seq 25 deny ip host 10.5.0.0 any log Dell(config-std-nacl)#seq 15 permit tcp 10.3.0.0 /16 any Dell(config-std-nacl)#show config ! ip access-list standard dilling seq 15 permit tcp 10.3.0.
PAGE 99
seq 5 permit 10.1.0.0/16 Dell(config-std-nacl)# seq 10 deny tcp any any eq 111 To view all configured IP ACLs, use the show ip accounting access-list command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip accounting access example interface gig 4/12 Extended IP access list example seq 15 deny udp any any eq 111 seq 20 deny udp any any eq 2049 seq 25 deny udp any any eq 31337 seq 30 deny tcp any any range 12345 12346 seq 35 permit udp host 10.21.126.225 10.4.5.0 /28 seq 40 permit udp host 10.21.126.226 10.4.5.
PAGE 100
Configure Filters, TCP Packets To create a filter for TCP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2. Configure an extended IP ACL filter for TCP packets.
PAGE 101
Configuring Filters Without a Sequence Number If you are creating an extended ACL with only one or two filters, you can let Dell Networking OS assign a sequence number based on the order in which the filters are configured. Dell Networking OS assigns filters in multiples of five. To configure a filter for an extended IP ACL without a specified sequence number, use any or all of the following commands: • Configure a deny or permit filter to examine IP packets.
PAGE 102
• When Dell Networking OS routes the packets, only the L3 ACL governs them because they are not filtered against an L2 ACL. • When Dell Networking OS switches the packets, first the L3 ACL filters them, then the L2 ACL filters them. • When Dell Networking OS switches the packets, the egress L3 ACL does not filter the packet.
PAGE 103
Applying an IP ACL To apply an IP ACL (standard or extended) to a physical or port channel interface, use the following commands. 1. Enter the interface number. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface slot/port 2. Configure an IP address for the interface, placing it in Layer-3 mode. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address 3. Apply an IP ACL to traffic entering or exiting an interface.
PAGE 104
3. show ip accounting access-list EXEC Privilege mode View the number of packets matching the ACL. Configure Ingress ACLs Ingress ACLs are applied to interfaces and to traffic entering the system. These system-wide ACLs eliminate the need to apply ACLs onto each interface and achieves the same results. By localizing target traffic, it is a simpler implementation. To create an ingress ACL, use the ip access-group command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 105
To create an egress ACL, use the ip access-group command in EXEC Privilege mode. The example shows viewing the configuration, applying rules to the newly created access group, and viewing the access list. NOTE: VRF based ACL configurations are not supported on the egress traffic. Example of Applying ACL Rules to Egress Traffic and Viewing ACL Configuration To specify ingress, use the out keyword. Begin applying rules to the ACL with the ip access-list extended abcd command.
PAGE 106
CPU-forwarded traffic. Using permit rules with the count option, you can track on a per-flow basis whether CPU-generated and CPU-forwarded packets were transmitted successfully. 1. Apply Egress ACLs to IPv4 system traffic. CONFIGURATION mode ip control-plane [egress filter] 2. Apply Egress ACLs to IPv6 system traffic. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 control-plane [egress filter] 3. Create a Layer 3 ACL using permit rules with the count option to describe the desired CPU traffic.
PAGE 107
• After a route matches a filter, the filter’s action is applied. No additional filters are applied to the route. Implementation Information In Dell Networking OS, prefix lists are used in processing routes for routing protocols (for example, router information protocol [RIP], open shortest path first [OSPF], and border gateway protocol [BGP]). NOTE: It is important to know which protocol your system supports prior to implementing prefixlists.
PAGE 108
Dell(conf-nprefixl)#seq 20 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 Dell(conf-nprefixl)#seq 12 deny 134.23.0.0 /16 Dell(conf-nprefixl)#seq 15 deny 120.23.14.0 /8 le 16 Dell(conf-nprefixl)#show config ! ip prefix-list juba seq 12 deny 134.23.0.0/16 seq 15 deny 120.0.0.0/8 le 16 seq 20 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 Dell(conf-nprefixl)# NOTE: The last line in the prefix list Juba contains a “permit all” statement.
PAGE 109
Viewing Prefix Lists To view all configured prefix lists, use the following commands. • Show detailed information about configured prefix lists. EXEC Privilege mode • show ip prefix-list detail [prefix-name] Show a table of summarized information about configured Prefix lists.
PAGE 110
• distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] Apply a configured prefix list to outgoing routes. You can specify an interface or type of route. If you enter the name of a non-existent prefix list, all routes are forwarded.
PAGE 111
ACL Resequencing ACL resequencing allows you to re-number the rules and remarks in an access or prefix list. The placement of rules within the list is critical because packets are matched against rules in sequential order. To order new rules using the current numbering scheme, use resequencing whenever there is no opportunity. For example, the following table contains some rules that are numbered in increments of 1.
PAGE 112
Example of Resequencing ACLs When Remarks and Rules Have the Same Number Example of Resequencing ACLs When Remarks and Rules Have Different Numbers The example shows the resequencing of an IPv4 access-list beginning with the number 2 and incrementing by 2. Remarks and rules that originally have the same sequence number have the same sequence number after you apply the resequence command.
PAGE 113
seq 8 permit ip any host 1.1.1.2 seq 10 permit ip any host 1.1.1.3 seq 12 permit ip any host 1.1.1.4 Route Maps Route maps are supported on Z9000 platform. Similar to ACLs and prefix lists, route maps are composed of a series of commands that contain a matching criterion and an action; however, route maps can change the packets meeting the criterion. ACLs and prefix lists can only drop or forward the packet or traffic. Route maps process routes for route redistribution.
PAGE 114
Creating a Route Map Route maps, ACLs, and prefix lists are similar in composition because all three contain filters, but route map filters do not contain the permit and deny actions found in ACLs and prefix lists. Route map filters match certain routes and set or specify values. To create a route map, use the following command. • Create a route map and assign it a unique name. The optional permit and deny keywords are the action of the route map.
PAGE 115
Dell(conf)#no route-map zakho 10 Dell(conf)#end Dell#show route-map route-map zakho, permit, sequence 20 Match clauses: interface GigabitEthernet 0/1 Set clauses: tag 35 level stub-area Dell# The following example shows a route map with multiple instances. The show config command displays only the configuration of the current route map instance. To view all instances of a specific route map, use the show route-map command.
PAGE 116
Also, if there are different instances of the same route-map, then it’s sufficient if a permit match happens in any instance of that route-map. Dell(conf)#route-map force permit 10 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 1000 Dell(config-route-map)#match metric 2000 In the following example, instance 10 permits the route having a tag value of 1000 and instances 20 and 30 deny the route having a tag value of 1000.
PAGE 117
• – For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Match destination routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • match ip address prefix-list-name Match destination routes specified in a prefix list (IPv6). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • match ipv6 address prefix-list-name Match next-hop routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4).
PAGE 118
• Add an AS-PATH number to the beginning of the AS-PATH. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • set as-path prepend as-number [... as-number] Generate a tag to be added to redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • set automatic-tag Specify an OSPF area or ISIS level for redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • set level {backbone | level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 | stub-area} Specify a value for the BGP route’s LOCAL_PREF attribute.
PAGE 119
Configure a Route Map for Route Redistribution Route maps on their own cannot affect traffic and must be included in different commands to affect routing traffic. Route redistribution occurs when Dell Networking OS learns the advertising routes from static or directly connected routes or another routing protocol. Different protocols assign different values to redistributed routes to identify either the routes and their origins.
PAGE 120
! set tag 34 Continue Clause Normally, when a match is found, set clauses are executed, and the packet is then forwarded; no more route-map modules are processed. If you configure the continue command at the end of a module, the next module (or a specified module) is processed even after a match is found. The following example shows a continue clause at the end of a route-map module. In this example, if a match is found in the route-map “test” module 10, module 30 is processed.
PAGE 121
database. When the configured maximum threshold has exceeded, log generation stops. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, a fresh interval timer starts and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold has exceeded, it is reenabled for this new interval.
PAGE 122
• When you delete an ACL entry, the logging settings associated with it are also removed. • ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and standard and extended MAC ACLs. • For ACL entries applied on port-channel interfaces, one match index for every member interface of the port-channel interface is assigned. Therefore, the total available match indices of 251 are split (125 match indices for permit action and 126 match indices for the deny action).
PAGE 123
The port mirroring application maintains and performs all the monitoring operations on the chassis. ACL information is sent to the ACL manager, which in turn notifies the ACL agent to add entries in the CAM area. Duplicate entries in the ACL are not saved. When a packet arrives at a port that is being monitored, the packet is validated against the configured ACL rules. If the packet matches an ACL rule, the system examines the corresponding flow processor to perform the action specified for that port.
PAGE 124
configuration to the ACL agent whenever the ACL agent is registered with the port mirroring application or when flow-based monitoring is enabled. The show monitor session session-id command has been enhanced to display the Type field in the output, which indicates whether a particular session is enabled for flow-monitoring.
PAGE 125
Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring is supported on the Z9000 platform. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. 1. Enable flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session.
PAGE 126
SessID -----0 A 126 Source -----Te 0/0 Destination ----------Te 0/2 Dir --rx Mode Source IP ---- --------Flow N/A Dest IP -------N/ Access Control Lists (ACLs)
PAGE 127
7 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This chapter describes the access control list (ACL) VLAN group and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. Optimizing CAM Utilization During the Attachment of ACLs to VLANs This functionality is supported on the Z9000 platform.
PAGE 128
for the ACL VLAN groups present on the system, an appropriate error message is displayed.
PAGE 129
• The maximum number of VLANs that you can configure as a member of ACL VLAN groups is limited to 512 on the Z9000 switch if two slices are allocated. If only one virtual flow processing slice is allocated, the maximum number of VLANs that you can configure as a member of an ACL VLAN group is 256 for the Z9000 switch. • Port ACL optimization is applicable only for ACLs that are applied without the VLAN range.
PAGE 130
4. Add VLAN member(s) to an ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode member vlan {VLAN-range} 5. Display all the ACL VLAN groups or display a specific ACL VLAN group, identified by name.
PAGE 131
4. View the number of flow processor (FP) blocks that is allocated for the different VLAN services.
PAGE 132
The following sample output displays the CAM space utilization when Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs are configured: Dell#show cam-usage acl Linecard|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============|=============|============ 11 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1008 | 0 | 1008 | | IN-L3 ACL | 12288 | 2 | 12286 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 1024 | 2 | 1022 | | OUT-L3 ACL | 1024 | 0 | 1024 The following sample output displays the CAM space utilization for Layer 2 ACLs: Dell#show cam
PAGE 133
You can configure only two of these features at a time. • To allocate the number of FP blocks for VLAN open flow operations, use the cam-acl-vlan vlanopenflow <0-2> command. • To allocate the number of FP blocks for VLAN iSCSI counters, use the cam-acl-vlan vlaniscsi <0-2> command. • To allocate the number of FP blocks for ACL VLAN optimization feature, use the cam-acl-vlan vlanaclopt <0-2> command. To reset the number of FP blocks to the default, use the no version of these commands.
PAGE 134
PAGE 135
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is supported only on the Z9000 platform. BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism.
PAGE 136
NOTE: A session state change from Up to Down is the only state change that triggers a link state change in the routing protocol client. BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 8. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state.
PAGE 137
Field Description system clears the poll bit and sets the final bit in its response. The poll and final bits are used during the handshake and in Demand mode (refer to BFD Sessions). NOTE: Dell Networking OS does not currently support multi-point sessions, Demand mode, authentication, or control plane independence; these bits are always clear. Detection Multiplier The number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. Length The entire length of the BFD packet.
PAGE 138
BFD Sessions BFD must be enabled on both sides of a link in order to establish a session. The two participating systems can assume either of two roles: Active The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. Passive The passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system.
PAGE 139
handshake. Now the discriminator values have been exchanged and the transmit intervals have been negotiated. 4. The passive system receives the control packet and changes its state to Up. Both systems agree that a session has been established. However, because both members must send a control packet — that requires a response — anytime there is a state change or change in a session parameter, the passive system sends a final response indicating the state change.
PAGE 140
receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 10. Session State Changes Important Points to Remember • On the platform, Dell Networking OS supports 128 sessions per stack unit at 200 minimum transmit and receive intervals with a multiplier of 3, and 64 sessions at 100 minimum transmit and receive intervals with a multiplier of 4. • Enable BFD on both ends of a link.
PAGE 141
• Configure BFD for IS-IS • Configure BFD for BGP • Configure BFD for VRRP • Configuring Protocol Liveness • Troubleshooting BFD Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol. Without BFD, if the remote system fails, the local system does not remove the connected route until the first failed attempt to send a packet.
PAGE 142
Establishing a Session on Physical Ports To establish a session, enable BFD at the interface level on both ends of the link, as shown in the following illustration. The configuration parameters do not need to match. Figure 11. Establishing a BFD Session on Physical Ports 1. Enter interface mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface 2. Assign an IP address to the interface if one is not already assigned. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address 3.
PAGE 143
Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 2.2.2.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:09:c3:e5 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
PAGE 144
Statistics: Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of packets received from neighbor: 4092 packets sent to neighbor: 4093 state changes: 1 messages from IFA about port state change: 0 messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 7 Disabling and Re-Enabling BFD BFD is enabled on all interfaces by default, though sessions are not created unless explicitly configured.
PAGE 145
Establishing Sessions for Static Routes Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. Figure 12. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes To establish a BFD session, use the following command. • Establish BFD sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. CONFIGURATION mode ip route bfd Example of the show bfd neighbors Command to Verify Static Routes To verify that sessions have been created for static routes, use the show bfd neighbors command.
PAGE 146
• Change parameters for all static route sessions. CONFIGURATION mode ip route bfd interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information. Disabling BFD for Static Routes If you disable BFD, all static route BFD sessions are torn down.
PAGE 147
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all OSPF neighbors.
PAGE 148
INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors Example of Verifying Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To view the established sessions, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Gi 2/1 Up 100 100 3 O * 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.
PAGE 149
• Disable BFD sessions with all OSPF neighbors. ROUTER-OSPF mode • no bfd all-neighbors Disable BFD sessions with all OSPF neighbors on an interface. INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors disable Configure BFD for OSPFv3 BFD for OSPFv3 is only supported on the Z9000 platform. BFD for OSPFv3 provides support for IPV6. Configuring BFD for OSPFv3 is a two-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally. 2. Establish sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors.
PAGE 150
To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the example in Displaying BFD for BGP Information. • Change parameters for all OSPFv3 sessions. ROUTER-OSPFv3 mode • bfd all-neighbors interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] Change parameters for OSPFv3 sessions on a single interface.
PAGE 151
Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors. ROUTER-ISIS mode • bfd all-neighbors Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface.
PAGE 152
The bold line shows that IS-IS BFD sessions are enabled. R2(conf-router_isis)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_isis)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Gi 2/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role.
PAGE 153
INTERFACE mose isis bfd all-neighbors disable Configure BFD for BGP Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) for BGP is supported on the Z9000 platform. In a BGP core network, BFD provides rapid detection of communication failures in BGP fast-forwarding paths between internal BGP (iBGP) and external BGP (eBGP) peers for faster network reconvergence. BFD for BGP is supported on 1GE, 10GE, 40GE, port-channel, and VLAN interfaces. BFD for BGP does not support IPv6 and the BGP multihop feature.
PAGE 154
Figure 15. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors The sample configuration shows alternative ways to establish a BFD session with a BGP neighbor: • By establishing BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by BGP (the bfd all-neighbors command). • By establishing a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor (the neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} bfd command) BFD packets originating from a router are assigned to the highest priority egress queue to minimize transmission delays.
PAGE 155
typical response is to terminate the peering session for the routing protocol and reconverge by bypassing the failed neighboring router. A log message is generated whenever BFD detects a failure condition. 1. Enable BFD globally. CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable 2. Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3. Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 4.
PAGE 156
ROUTER BGP mode • neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd disable Remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor. ROUTER BGP mode no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd disable Use BFD in a BGP Peer Group You can establish a BFD session for the members of a peer group (the neighbor peer-group-name bfd command in ROUTER BGP configuration mode).
PAGE 157
Example of Verifying BGP Configuration Example of Viewing All BFD Neighbors Example of Viewing BFD Neighbor Detail Example of Viewing Configured BFD Counters Example of Viewing BFD Summary Information Example of Viewing BFD Information for a Specified Neighbor R2# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 2 neighbor 1.1.1.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 1.1.1.2 no shutdown neighbor 2.2.2.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 2.2.2.2 no shutdown neighbor 3.3.3.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 3.3.3.
PAGE 158
Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 4762 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 4490 Number of state changes: 2 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 5 Session Discriminator: 10 Neighbor Discriminator: 11 Local Addr: 2.2.2.3 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:66:da:34 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
PAGE 159
Up Down Admin Down : 1 : 0 : 2 The bold line shows the message displayed when you enable BFD for BGP connections. R2# show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 10.0.0.1, local AS number 2 BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0 BFD is enabled, Interval 100 Min_rx 100 Multiplier 3 Role Active 3 neighbor(s) using 24168 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.
PAGE 160
Connections established 1; dropped 0 Last reset never Local host: 2.2.2.3, Local port: 63805 Foreign host: 2.2.2.2, Foreign port: 179 E1200i_ExaScale# R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.3 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.3, remote AS 1, external link Member of peer-group pg1 for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP neighbor mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ...
PAGE 161
Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all VRRP neighbors at once, or a session can be established with a particular neighbor. Figure 16. Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors To establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors, use the following command. • Establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors.
PAGE 162
The bold line shows that VRRP BFD sessions are enabled. R1(conf-if-gi-4/25)#vrrp bfd all-neighbors R1(conf-if-gi-4/25)#do show bfd neighbor * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) V - VRRP LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.5.1 2.2.5.2 Gi 4/25 Down 1000 1000 3 V To view session state information, use the show vrrp command. The bold line shows the VRRP BFD session.
PAGE 163
Disabling BFD for VRRP If you disable any or all VRRP sessions, the sessions are torn down. A final Admin Down control packet is sent to all neighbors and sessions on the remote system change to the Down state. To disable all VRRP sessions on an interface, sessions for a particular VRRP group, or for a particular VRRP session on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable all VRRP sessions on an interface. INTERFACE mode • no vrrp bfd all-neighbors Disable all VRRP sessions in a VRRP group.
PAGE 164
R1(conf-if-gi-4/24)#00:54:38: %RPM0-P:RP2 %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Down for neighbor 2.2.2.2 on interface Gi 4/24 (diag: 0) 00:54:38 : Sent packet for session with neighbor 2.2.2.2 on Gi 4/24 TX packet dump: Version:1, Diag code:0, State:Down, Poll bit:0, Final bit:0, Demand bit:0 myDiscrim:4, yourDiscrim:0, minTx:1000000, minRx:1000000, multiplier:3, minEchoRx:0 00:54:38 : Received packet for session with neighbor 2.2.2.
PAGE 165
Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) 9 Border gateway protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) version 4 (BGPv4) is supported on the Z9000 platform. This chapter provides a general description of BGPv4 as it is supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). BGP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS).
PAGE 166
Figure 17. Internal BGP BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network. Updates traveling through the network and returning to the same node are easily detected and discarded.
PAGE 167
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. Sessions and Peers When two routers communicate using the BGP protocol, a BGP session is started. The two end-points of that session are Peers. A Peer is also called a Neighbor.
PAGE 168
Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies. In order to make decisions in its operations with other BGP peers, a BGP process uses a simple finite state machine that consists of six states: Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm, and Established. For each peer-to-peer session, a BGP implementation tracks which of these six states the session is in.
PAGE 169
Route reflection divides iBGP peers into two groups: client peers and nonclient peers. A route reflector and its client peers form a route reflection cluster. Because BGP speakers announce only the best route for a given prefix, route reflector rules are applied after the router makes its best path decision. • If a route was received from a nonclient peer, reflect the route to all client peers. • If the route was received from a client peer, reflect the route to all nonclient and all client peers.
PAGE 170
• Next Hop NOTE: There are no hard coded limits on the number of attributes that are supported in the BGP. Taking into account other constraints such as the Packet Size, maximum number of attributes are supported in BGP. Communities BGP communities are sets of routes with one or more common attributes. Communities are a way to assign common attributes to multiple routes at the same time. NOTE: Duplicate communities are not rejected.
PAGE 171
Figure 20. BGP Best Path Selection Best Path Selection Details 1. Prefer the path with the largest WEIGHT attribute. 2. Prefer the path with the largest LOCAL_PREF attribute. 3. Prefer the path that was locally Originated via a network command, redistribute command or aggregate-address command. a. 4. Routes originated with the Originated via a network or redistribute commands are preferred over routes originated with the aggregate-address command.
PAGE 172
c. Paths with no MED are treated as “worst” and assigned a MED of 4294967295. 7. Prefer external (EBGP) to internal (IBGP) paths or confederation EBGP paths. 8. Prefer the path with the lowest IGP metric to the BGP if next-hop is selected when synchronization is disabled and only an internal path remains. 9. Dell Networking OS deems the paths as equal and does not perform steps 9 through 11, if the following criteria is met: a.
PAGE 173
and AS300. This is advertised to all routers within AS100, causing all BGP speakers to prefer the path through Router B. Figure 21. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria.
PAGE 174
Figure 22. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
PAGE 175
*> 7.0.0.0/30 *> 9.2.0.0/16 10.114.8.33 10.114.8.33 0 10 0 0 18508 18508 ? 701 i AS Path The AS path is the list of all ASs that all the prefixes listed in the update have passed through. The local AS number is added by the BGP speaker when advertising to a eBGP neighbor. NOTE: Any update that contains the AS path number 0 is valid. The AS path is shown in the following example. The origin attribute is shown following the AS path information (shown in bold).
PAGE 176
Multiprotocol BGP Multiprotocol extensions for BGP (MBGP) is defined in IETF RFC 2858. MBGP allows different types of address families to be distributed in parallel. MBGP for IPv4 multicast is supported on the Z9000 platform. MBGP allows information about the topology of the IP multicast-capable routers to be exchanged separately from the topology of normal IPv4 and IPv6 unicast routers. It allows a multicast routing topology different from the unicast routing topology.
PAGE 177
• internal configured, BGP advertises the metric configured in the redistribute command as MED. If BGP peer outbound route-map has metric configured, all other metrics are overwritten by this configuration. NOTE: When redistributing static, connected, or OSPF routes, there is no metric option. Simply assign the appropriate route-map to the redistributed route. The following table lists some examples of these rules. Table 6.
PAGE 178
Configure 4-byte AS numbers with the four-octet-support command. AS4 Number Representation Dell Networking OS supports multiple representations of 4-byte AS numbers: asplain, asdot+, and asdot. NOTE: The ASDOT and ASDOT+ representations are supported only with the 4-Byte AS numbers feature. If 4-Byte AS numbers are not implemented, only ASPLAIN representation is supported. ASPLAIN is the method Dell Networking OS has used for all previous Dell Networking OS versions.
PAGE 179
Dell(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asdot+ Dell(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 100 bgp asnotation asdot+ bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 31571, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS-PLAIN Dell(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asplain Dell(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 172.30.1.
PAGE 180
appear as if it still belongs to Router B’s old network (AS 200) as far as communicating with Router C is concerned. Figure 23. Before and After AS Number Migration with Local-AS Enabled When you complete your migration, and you have reconfigured your network with the new information, disable this feature. If you use the “no prepend” option, the Local-AS does not prepend to the updates received from the eBGP peer.
PAGE 181
3. Prepend "65001 65002" to as-path. Local-AS is prepended before the route-map to give an impression that update passed through a router in AS 200 before it reached Router B. BGP4 Management Information Base (MIB) The FORCE10-BGP4-V2-MIB enhances Dell Networking OS BGP management information base (MIB) support with many new simple network management protocol (SNMP) objects and notifications (traps) defined in draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05.
PAGE 182
• The f10BgpM2[Cfg]PeerReflectorClient field is populated based on the assumption that routereflector clients are not in a full mesh if you enable BGP client-2-client reflection and that the BGP speaker acting as reflector advertises routes learned from one client to another client. If disabled, it is assumed that clients are in a full mesh and there is no need to advertise prefixes to the other clients. • High CPU utilization may be observed during an SNMP walk of a large BGP Loc-RIB.
PAGE 183
By default, Dell Networking OS compares the MED attribute on different paths from within the same AS (the bgp always-compare-med command is not enabled). NOTE: In Dell Networking OS, all newly configured neighbors and peer groups are disabled. To enable a neighbor or peer group, enter the neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown command. The following table displays the default values for BGP on Dell Networking OS. Table 7.
PAGE 184
NOTE: Sample Configurations for enabling BGP routers are found at the end of this chapter. 1. Assign an AS number and enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number • as-number: from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte) or 0.1 to 65535.65535 (Dotted format). Only one AS is supported per system. NOTE: If you enter a 4-Byte AS number, 4-Byte AS support is enabled automatically. a. Enable 4-Byte support for the BGP process. NOTE: This command is OPTIONAL.
PAGE 185
3. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown Example of the show ip bgp summary Command (2-Byte AS number displayed) Example of the show ip bgp summary Command (4-Byte AS number displayed) Example of the show ip bgp neighbors Command Example of Verifying BGP Configuration NOTE: When you change the configuration of a BGP neighbor, always reset it by entering the clear ip bgp * command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 186
For the router’s identifier, Dell Networking OS uses the highest IP address of the Loopback interfaces configured. Because Loopback interfaces are virtual, they cannot go down, thus preventing changes in the router ID. If you do not configure Loopback interfaces, the highest IP address of any interface is used as the router ID. To view the status of BGP neighbors, use the show ip bgp neighbors command in EXEC Privilege mode as shown in the first example.
PAGE 187
Last reset never No active TCP connection Dell# R2#show running-config bgp ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list ISP1in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.3 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.32.3 no shutdown neighbor 100.10.92.9 remote-as 65192 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.
PAGE 188
• NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode • bgp asnotation asdot Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation.
PAGE 189
Configuring Peer Groups To configure multiple BGP neighbors at one time, create and populate a BGP peer group. An advantage of peer groups is that members of a peer group inherit the configuration properties of the group and share same update policy. A maximum of 256 peer groups are allowed on the system. Create a peer group by assigning it a name, then adding members to the peer group. After you create a peer group, you can configure route policies for it.
PAGE 190
6. Add a neighbor as a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number Formats: IP Address A.B.C.D • Peer-Group Name: 16 characters. • as-number: the range is from 0 to 65535 (2-Byte) or 1 to 4294967295 | 0.1 to 65535.65535 (4Byte) or 0.1 to 65535.65535 (Dotted format) To add an external BGP (EBGP) neighbor, configure the as-number parameter with a number different from the BGP as-number configured in the router bgp as-number command.
PAGE 191
neighbor zanzibar shutdown neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 65535 neighbor 10.1.1.1 shutdown neighbor 10.14.8.60 remote-as 18505 neighbor 10.14.8.60 no shutdown Dell(conf-router_bgp)# To enable a peer group, use the neighbor peer-group-name no shutdown command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode (shown in bold).
PAGE 192
10.68.178.1 10.68.179.1 10.68.180.1 10.68.181.1 10.68.182.1 10.68.183.1 10.68.184.1 10.68.185.1 Dell> Configuring BGP Fast Fall-Over By default, a BGP session is governed by the hold time. BGP routers typically carry large routing tables, so frequent session resets are not desirable. The BGP fast fall-over feature reduces the convergence time while maintaining stability. The connection to a BGP peer is immediately reset if a link to a directly connected external peer fails.
PAGE 193
CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) fall-over enabled Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 52, neighbor version 52 4 accepted prefixes consume 16 bytes Prefix advertised 0, denied 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 6; dropped 5 Last reset 00:19:37, due to Reset by peer Notification History 'Connection Reset'
PAGE 194
Configuring Passive Peering When you enable a peer-group, the software sends an OPEN message to initiate a TCP connection. If you enable passive peering for the peer group, the software does not send an OPEN message, but it responds to an OPEN message. When a BGP neighbor connection with authentication configured is rejected by a passive peer-group, Dell Networking OS does not allow another passive peer-group on the same subnet to connect with the BGP neighbor.
PAGE 195
– Peer Group Name: 16 characters. – AS-number: 0 to 65535 (2-Byte) or 1 to 4294967295 (4-Byte) or 0.1 to 65535.65535 (Dotted format). – No Prepend: specifies that local AS values are not prepended to announcements from the neighbor. Format: IP Address: A.B.C.D. You must Configure Peer Groups before assigning it to an AS. This feature is not supported on passive peer groups. Example of the Verifying that Local AS Numbering is Disabled The first line in bold shows the actual AS number.
PAGE 196
– Number: 1 through 10. Format: IP Address: A.B.C.D. You must Configure Peer Groups before assigning it to an AS. Example of Viewing AS Numbers in AS Paths The lines shown in bold are the number of times ASN 65123 can appear in the AS path (allows–in 9). To disable this feature, use the no neighbor allow-as in number command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.
PAGE 197
If you configure your system to do so, Dell Networking OS can perform the following actions during a hot failover: • Save all forwarding information base (FIB) and content addressable memory (CAM) entries on the line card and continue forwarding traffic while the secondary route processor module (RPM) is coming online. • Advertise to all BGP neighbors and peer-groups that the forwarding state of all routes has been saved.
PAGE 198
• Set the maximum restart time for the neighbor or peer-group. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} graceful-restart [restart-time timein-seconds] • The default is 120 seconds. Local router supports graceful restart for this neighbor or peer-group as a receiver only. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode • neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} graceful-restart [role receiver-only] Set the maximum time to retain the restarting neighbor’s or peer-group’s stale paths.
PAGE 199
4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5. Use a configured AS-PATH ACL for route filtering and manipulation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} filter-list as-path-name {in | out} If you assign an non-existent or empty AS-PATH ACL, the software allows all routes. Example of the show ip bgp paths Command To view all BGP path attributes in the BGP database, use the show ip bgp paths command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 200
Regular Expression Definition ^ (caret) Matches the beginning of the input string. Alternatively, when used as the first character within brackets [^ ], this matches any number except the ones specified within the brackets. $ (dollar) Matches the end of the input string. . (period) Matches any single character, including white space. * (asterisk) Matches 0 or more sequences of the immediately previous character or pattern.
PAGE 201
Dell(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA filter-list Eaglein neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.155.15.2 remote-as 32 neighbor 10.155.15.2 filter-list 1 in neighbor 10.155.15.2 shutdown Dell(conf-router_bgp)#ex Dell(conf)#ex Dell#show ip as-path-access-lists ip as-path access-list Eagle deny 32$ Dell# Redistributing Routes In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the BGP process.
PAGE 202
– map-name: name of a configured route map. Enabling Additional Paths The add-path feature is disabled by default. NOTE: Dell Networking OS recommends not using multipath and add path simultaneously in a route reflector. To allow multiple paths sent to peers, use the following commands. 1. Allow the advertisement of multiple paths for the same address prefix without the new paths replacing any previous ones.
PAGE 203
To configure an IP community list, use these commands. 1. Create a community list and enter COMMUNITY-LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip community-list community-list-name 2. Configure a community list by denying or permitting specific community numbers or types of community.
PAGE 204
Configuring an IP Extended Community List To configure an IP extended community list, use these commands. 1. Create a extended community list and enter the EXTCOMMUNITY-LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip extcommunity-list extcommunity-list-name 2. Two types of extended communities are supported.
PAGE 205
Filtering Routes with Community Lists To use an IP community list or IP extended community list to filter routes, you must apply a match community filter to a route map and then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1. Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2. Configure a match filter for all routes meeting the criteria in the IP community or IP extended community list.
PAGE 206
To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. If you want to remove or add a specific COMMUNITY number from a BGP path, you must create a route map with one or both of the following statements in the route map. Then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1. Enter ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2.
PAGE 207
Dell>show ip bgp community BGP table version is 3762622, local router ID is 10.114.8.48 Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best, i - internal Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network * i 3.0.0.0/8 *>i 4.2.49.12/30 * i 4.21.132.0/23 *>i 4.24.118.16/30 *>i 4.24.145.0/30 *>i 4.24.187.12/30 *>i 4.24.202.0/30 *>i 4.25.88.0/30 *>i 6.1.0.0/16 *>i 6.2.0.0/22 *>i 6.3.0.0/18 *>i 6.4.0.0/16 *>i 6.5.0.0/19 *>i 6.8.0.0/20 *>i 6.9.0.0/20 *>i 6.10.0.0/15 *>i 6.14.0.0/15 *>i 6.133.0.
PAGE 208
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp default local-preference value – value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 100. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show running-config bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. A more flexible method for manipulating the LOCAL_PREF attribute value is to use a route map. 1. Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2.
PAGE 209
set next-hop ip-address Changing the WEIGHT Attribute To change how the WEIGHT attribute is used, enter the first command. You can also use route maps to change this and other BGP attributes. For example, you can include the second command in a route map to specify the next hop address. • Assign a weight to the neighbor connection. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight weight – weight: the range is from 0 to 65535. • The default is 0. Sets weight for the route.
PAGE 210
For inbound and outbound updates the order of preference is: • prefix lists (using the neighbor distribute-list command) • AS-PATH ACLs (using the neighbor filter-list command) • route maps (using the neighbor route-map command) Prior to filtering BGP routes, create the prefix list, AS-PATH ACL, or route map. For configuration information about prefix lists, AS-PATH ACLs, and route maps, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs).
PAGE 211
• If the prefix list contains no filters, all routes are permitted. • If none of the routes match any of the filters in the prefix list, the route is denied. This action is called an implicit deny. (If you want to forward all routes that do not match the prefix list criteria, you must configure a prefix list filter to permit all routes. For example, you could have the following filter as the last filter in your prefix list permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32).
PAGE 212
Filtering BGP Routes Using AS-PATH Information To filter routes based on AS-PATH information, use these commands. 1. Create a AS-PATH ACL and assign it a name. CONFIGURATION mode ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2. Create a AS-PATH ACL filter with a deny or permit action. AS-PATH ACL mode {deny | permit} as-regular-expression 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. AS-PATH ACL exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5.
PAGE 213
• Assign an ID to a router reflector cluster. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp cluster-id cluster-id • You can have multiple clusters in an AS. Configure the local router as a route reflector and the neighbor or peer group identified is the route reflector client. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-reflector-client When you enable a route reflector, Dell Networking OS automatically enables route reflection to all clients.
PAGE 214
Configuring BGP Confederations Another way to organize routers within an AS and reduce the mesh for IBGP peers is to configure BGP confederations. As with route reflectors, BGP confederations are recommended only for IBGP peering involving many IBGP peering sessions per router. Basically, when you configure BGP confederations, you break the AS into smaller sub-AS, and to those outside your network, the confederations appear as one AS.
PAGE 215
• history entry — an entry that stores information on a downed route • dampened path — a path that is no longer advertised • penalized path — a path that is assigned a penalty To configure route flap dampening parameters, set dampening parameters using a route map, clear information on route dampening and return suppressed routes to active state, view statistics on route flapping, or change the path selection from the default mode (deterministic) to non-deterministic, use the following commands.
PAGE 216
show ip bgp flap-statistics [ip-address [mask]] [filter-list as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression] – ip-address [mask]: enter the IP address and mask. – filter-list as-path-name: enter the name of an AS-PATH ACL. – regexp regular-expression: enter a regular express to match on. • By default, the path selection in Dell Networking OS is deterministic, that is, paths are compared irrespective of the order of their arrival.
PAGE 217
BGP table version is 855562, main routing table version 780266 122836 network entrie(s) and 221664 paths using 29697640 bytes of memory 34298 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 1920688 bytes of memory 29577 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 1384403 bytes of memory 184 BGP community entrie(s) using 7616 bytes of memory Dampening enabled. 0 history paths, 0 dampened paths, 0 penalized paths Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer 10.114.8.34 18508 82883 79977 780266 10.114.8.
PAGE 218
without clearing the BGP Session. Soft-reconfig can be done on a per-neighbor basis and can either be inbound or outbound. BGP soft-reconfiguration clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection. To reset a BGP connection using BGP soft reconfiguration, use the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode at the system prompt.
PAGE 219
Dell>router bgp 100 neighbor 10.108.1.1 remote-as 200 neighbor 10.108.1.1 soft-reconfiguration inbound Route Map Continue The BGP route map continue feature, continue [sequence-number], (in ROUTE-MAP mode) allows movement from one route-map entry to a specific route-map entry (the sequence number). If you do not specify a sequence number, the continue feature moves to the next sequence number (also known as an “implied continue”).
PAGE 220
• Send a capacity advertisement to the peer in the BGP Open message specifying IPv4 multicast as a supported AFI/SAFI (Subsequent Address Family Identifier). • If the corresponding capability is received in the peer’s Open message, BGP marks the peer as supporting the AFI/SAFI. • When exchanging updates with the peer, BGP sends and receives IPv4 multicast routes if the peer is marked as supporting that AFI/SAFI.
PAGE 221
EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalive [in | out] View information about BGP notifications received from or sent to neighbors. EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out] View information about BGP updates and filter by prefix name. EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] updates [in | out] [prefix-list name] Enable soft-reconfiguration debug.
PAGE 222
Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1395, neighbor version 1394 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), 0 withdrawn by peer Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, 0 withdrawn from peer Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:12, due to Missing well known att
PAGE 223
Dell#show capture bgp-pdu neighbor 20.20.20.2 Incoming packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20.20.20.
PAGE 224
Sample Configurations The following example configurations show how to enable BGP and set up some peer groups. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, you can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Be sure that you make the necessary changes. The following illustration shows the configurations described on the following examples.
PAGE 225
Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) Example of Enabling BGP (Router 2) Example of Enabling BGP (Router 3) Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 1) Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 2) Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 3) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/24 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.1/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 1/21 R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#ip address 10.0.1.
PAGE 226
R2(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 2/11 R2(conf-if-te-2/11)#ip address 10.0.1.22/24 R2(conf-if-te-2/11)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-2/11)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 2/11 ip address 10.0.1.22/24 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-2/11)#int te 2/31 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#ip address 10.0.2.2/24 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 2/31 ip address 10.0.2.2/24 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-2/31)# R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#router bgp 99 R2(conf-router_bgp)#network 192.168.
PAGE 227
R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.1 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.1 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.1 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config remote 99 no shut update-source loop 0 remote 99 no shut update loop 0 conf R1(conf)#router bgp 99 R1(conf-router_bgp)# network 192.168.128.
PAGE 228
'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 Last notification (len 21) sent 00:00:57 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00150306 00000000 Local host: 192.168.128.1, Local port: 179 Foreign host: 192.168.128.2, Foreign port: 65464 BGP neighbor is 192.168.128.3, remote AS 100, external link Member of peer-group BBB for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 192.168.128.
PAGE 229
R3#conf R3(conf)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.2 peer-group BBB R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 peer-group BBB R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.
PAGE 230
BGP version 4, remote router ID 192.168.128.
PAGE 231
Content Addressable Memory (CAM) 10 Content addressable memory (CAM) is supported on the Z9000 platform. CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 and Layer 3 forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies. CAM Allocation The user configurable CAM allocations feature is available on the Z9000 platform.
PAGE 232
CAM Allocation Setting Openflow 0 fedgovacl 0 The following additional CAM allocation settings are supported on the S6000, S4810 or S4820T platforms only. Table 9. Additional Default CAM Allocation Settings Additional CAM Allocation Setting FCoE ACL (fcoeacl) 0 ISCSI Opt ACL (iscsioptacl) 0 The ipv6acl and vman-dual-qos allocations must be entered as a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10). All other profile allocations can use either even or odd numbered ranges.
PAGE 233
Dell(conf)# 1. Select a cam-acl action. CONFIGURATION mode cam-acl [default | l2acl] NOTE: Selecting default resets the CAM entries to the default settings. Select l2acl to allocate the desired space for all other regions. 2. Enter the number of FP blocks for each region.
PAGE 234
View CAM Profiles To view the current CAM profile for the chassis and each component, use the show cam-profile command. This command also shows the profile that is loaded after the next chassis or component reload.
PAGE 235
L2Acl Ipv4Acl Ipv6Acl Ipv4Qos L2Qos L2PT IpMacAcl VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6 4 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 2 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) Next Boot(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 4 Ipv4Acl : 4 2 Ipv6Acl : 0 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 2 L2Qos : 1 1 L2PT : 0 0 IpMacAcl : 0 0 VmanQos : 0 0 VmanDualQos : 0 0 EcfmAcl : 0 0 FcoeAcl : 0 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 0 ipv4pbr :
PAGE 236
ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : 0 0 0 0 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 -- Stack unit 7 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl :
PAGE 237
| | | 0 | | | | | | | | | | | Codes: * - cam usage Dell# 7 OUT-L2 ACL IN-L3 ACL IN-V6 ACL IN-L2 ACL OUT-L3 ACL OUT-V6 ACL OUT-L2 ACL is above 90%. | | | | | | | 206 512 0 768 158 158 206 | | | | | | | 7 1 0 0 5 0 7 | | | | | | | 199 511 0 768 153 158 199 CAM Optimization CAM optimization is supported on the Z9000 platform.
PAGE 238
If you exceed the QoS CAM space, follow these steps. 1. Verify that you have configured a CAM profile that allocates 24 K entries to the IPv4 system flow region. 2. Allocate more entries in the IPv4Flow region to QoS. Dell Networking OS supports the ability to view the actual CAM usage before applying a service-policy. The test cam-usage service-policy command provides this test framework. For more information, refer to Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space.
PAGE 239
Control Plane Policing (CoPP) 11 Control plane policing (CoPP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
PAGE 240
Figure 26. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Configure Control Plane Policing For example, border gateway protocol (BGP) and internet control message protocol (ICMP) share same queue (Q6); Q6 has 400 PPS of bandwidth by default. The desired rate of ICMP is 100 PPS and the remaining 300 PPS is assigned to BGP. If ICMP packets come at 400 PPS, BGP packets may be dropped though ICMP packets are rate-limited to 100 PPS.
PAGE 241
CoPP policies are configured by creating extended ACL rules and specifying rate-limits through QoS policies. The ACLs and QoS policies are assigned as service-policies. Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS).
PAGE 242
Example of Creating the IP/IPv6/MAC Extended ACL Example of Creating the QoS Input Policy Example of Creating the QoS Class Map Example of Matching the QoS Class Map to the QoS Policy Example of Creating the Control Plane Service Policy Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended ospf cpu-qos Dell(conf-ip-acl-cpuqos)#permit ospf Dell(conf-ip-acl-cpuqos)#exit Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended bgp cpu-qos Dell(conf-ip-acl-cpuqos)#permit bgp Dell(conf-ip-acl-cpuqos)#exit Dell(conf)#mac access-list extended lacp cpu-qo
PAGE 243
Dell(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#class-map class-ipv6 qos-policy rate_limit_200k Dell(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#exit Dell(conf)#control-plane-cpuqos Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#service-policy rate-limit-protocols egressFP_rate_policy Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#exit Configuring CoPP for CPU Queues Controlling traffic on the CPU queues does not require ACL rules, but does require QoS policies.
PAGE 244
Dell#conf Dell(conf)#control-plane Dell(conf-control-plane)#service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues cpuq_rate_policy CoPP for OSPFv3 Packets This functionality is supported on the S6000, S4810, S4820T, Z9000, and MXL platforms. You can create an IPv6 ACL for control-plane traffic policing for OSPFv3, in addition to the CoPP support for VRRP, BGP, and ICMP. This functionality is supported on the S4810, S4820T,S6000, MXL, and Z9000 platforms.
PAGE 245
Increased CPU Queues for CoPP FTOS classifies every packet ingress from the front end port to system as control traffic or data traffic by having the pre-defined rules based on protocol type or packets types like ttl, slow path etc. FP is used to classify the traffic to transmit the control traffic to CMIC port. Other major function performed by the FP rule is to decide to which CPU queue the packet must be sent. All other packets will be forwarded or dropped at the ingress.
PAGE 246
NDP Packets Neighbor discovery protocol has 4 types of packets NS, NA, RA, RS. These packets need to be taken to CPU for neighbor discovery. • Unicast NDP packets: – Packets hitting the L3 host/route table and discovered as local terminated packets/CPU bound traffic. For CPU bound traffic route entry have CPU action. Below are packets are CPU bound traffic. • * Packets destined to chassis.
PAGE 247
CPU Queue Weights Rate (pps) Protocol 4 127 2000 IPC/IRC, VLT Control frames 5 16 300 ARP Request, NS, RS, iSCSI OPT Snooping 6 16 400 ICMP, ARP Reply, NTP, Local terminated L3, NA, RA,ICMPv6 (other Than NDP and MLD) 7 64 400 xSTP, FRRP, LACP, 802.
PAGE 248
To configure control-plane policing, perform the following: 1. Create an IPv6 ACL for control-plane traffic policing for ospfv3. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#ipv6 access-list ospfv3 cpu-qos Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit ospf 2. Create a QoS input policy for the router and assign the policing. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#qos-policy-input ospfv3_rate cpu-qos Dell(conf-in-qos-policy-cpuqos)#rate-police 1500 16 peak 1500 16 3.
PAGE 249
Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Dell# 300 2000 400 400 1100 To view the queue mapping for each configured protocol, use the show ip protocol-queuemapping command.
PAGE 250
PAGE 251
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) 12 Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is available on the Z9000 platform. DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
PAGE 252
Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
PAGE 253
Option Number and Description Identifiers a user-defined string used by the Relay Agent to forward DHCP client packets to a specific server. L2 DHCP Snooping Option 82 User Port Stacking Option 230 Specifies IP addresses for DHCP messages received from the client that are to be monitored to build a DHCP snooping database. Set the stacking option variable to provide DHCP server stack-port detail when the DHCP offer is set. End Option 255 Signals the last option in the DHCP packet.
PAGE 254
Figure 28. Client and Server Messaging Implementation Information The following describes DHCP implementation. • Dell Networking implements DHCP based on RFC 2131 and RFC 3046. • IP source address validation is a sub-feature of DHCP Snooping; the Dell Networking OS uses access control lists (ACLs) internally to implement this feature and as such, you cannot apply ACLs to an interface which has IP source address validation.
PAGE 255
Configure the System to be a DHCP Server Configuring the system to be a DHCP server is supported only on the Z9000 platform. A DHCP server is a network device that has been programmed to provide network configuration parameters to clients upon request. Servers typically serve many clients, making host management much more organized and efficient. The following table lists the key responsibilities of DHCP servers. Table 10.
PAGE 256
3. Specify the range of IP addresses from which the DHCP server may assign addresses. DHCP mode network network/prefix-length • network: the subnet address. • prefix-length: specifies the number of bits used for the network portion of the address you specify. The prefix-length range is from 17 to 31. 4. Display the current pool configuration. DHCP mode show config After an IP address is leased to a client, only that client may release the address.
PAGE 257
lease {days [hours] [minutes] | infinite} The default is 24 hours. Specifying a Default Gateway The IP address of the default router should be on the same subnet as the client. To specify a default gateway, follow this step. • Specify default gateway(s) for the clients on the subnet, in order of preference.
PAGE 258
Creating Manual Binding Entries An address binding is a mapping between the IP address and the media access control (MAC) address of a client. The DHCP server assigns the client an available IP address automatically, and then creates an entry in the binding table. However, the administrator can manually create an entry for a client; manual bindings are useful when you want to guarantee that a particular network device receives a particular IP address.
PAGE 259
Configure the System to be a Relay Agent This feature is available on the Z-Series platform. DHCP clients and servers request and offer configuration information via broadcast DHCP messages. Routers do not forward broadcasts, so if there are no DHCP servers on the subnet, the client does not receive a response to its request and therefore cannot access the network.
PAGE 260
Figure 29. Configuring a Relay Agent To view the ip helper-address configuration for an interface, use the show ip interface command from EXEC privilege mode. Example of the show ip interface Command R1_E600#show ip int gig 1/3 GigabitEthernet 1/3 is up, line protocol is down Internet address is 10.11.0.1/24 Broadcast address is 10.11.0.255 Address determined by user input IP MTU is 1500 bytes Helper address is 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.
PAGE 261
ICMP redirects are not sent ICMP unreachables are not sent Configure the System to be a DHCP Client A DHCP client is a network device that requests an IP address and configuration parameters from a DHCP server. Implement the DHCP client functionality as follows: • The switch can obtain a dynamically assigned IP address from a DHCP server. A start-up configuration is not received. Use bare metal provisioning (BMP) to receive configuration parameters (Dell Networking OS version and a configuration file).
PAGE 262
• To reinstall management routes added by the DHCP client that is removed or replaced by the same statically configured management routes, release the DHCP IP address and renew it on the management interface. • Management routes added by the DHCP client have higher precedence over the same statically configured management route. Static routes are not removed from the running configuration if a dynamically acquired management route added by the DHCP client overwrites a static management route.
PAGE 263
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Do not enable the DHCP client on an interface and set the priority to 255 or assign the same DHCP interface IP address to a VRRP virtual group. Doing so guarantees that this router becomes the VRRP group owner. To use the router as the VRRP owner, if you enable a DHCP client on an interface that is added to a VRRP group, assign a priority less than 255 but higher than any other priority assigned in the group.
PAGE 264
• track the number of address requests per relay agent. Restricting the number of addresses available per relay agent can harden a server against address exhaustion attacks. • associate client MAC addresses with a relay agent to prevent offering an IP address to a client spoofing the same MAC address on a different relay agent. • assign IP addresses according to the relay agent. This prevents generating DHCP offers in response to requests from an unauthorized relay agent.
PAGE 265
Dell Networking OS Behavior: Binding table entries are deleted when a lease expires or when the relay agent encounters a DHCPRELEASE. Line cards maintain a list of snooped VLANs. When the binding table is exhausted, DHCP packets are dropped on snooped VLANs, while these packets are forwarded across non-snooped VLANs. Because DHCP packets are dropped, no new IP address assignments are made. However, DHCPRELEASE and DHCPDECLINE packets are allowed so that the DHCP snooping table can decrease in size.
PAGE 266
Example of the show ip dhcp snooping Command View the DHCP snooping statistics with the show ip dhcp snooping command. Dell#show ip dhcp snooping IP IP IP IP DHCP DHCP DHCP DHCP Snooping Snooping Mac Verification Relay Information-option Relay Trust Downstream : : : : Enabled. Disabled. Disabled. Disabled.
PAGE 267
receives an ARP message for which a relevant entry already exists in its ARP cache, it overwrites the existing entry with the new information. The lack of authentication in ARP makes it vulnerable to spoofing. ARP spoofing is a technique attackers use to inject false IP-to-MAC mappings into the ARP cache of a network device. It is used to launch manin-the-middle (MITM), and denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, among others.
PAGE 268
Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection To enable dynamic ARP inspection, use the following commands. 1. Enable DHCP snooping. 2. Validate ARP frames against the DHCP snooping binding table. INTERFACE VLAN mode arp inspection Example of Viewing the ARP Database Example of Viewing ARP Packets To view entries in the ARP database, use the show arp inspection database command.
PAGE 269
Source Address Validation Using the DHCP binding table, Dell Networking OS can perform three types of source address validation (SAV). Table 11. Three Types of Source Address Validation Source Address Validation Description IP Source Address Validation Prevents IP spoofing by forwarding only IP packets that have been validated against the DHCP binding table.
PAGE 270
CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Enabling IP+MAC Source Address Validation The following feature is available on the Z9000 platform. IP source address validation (SAV) validates the IP source address of an incoming packet against the DHCP snooping binding table. IP+MAC SAV ensures that the IP source address and MAC source address are a legitimate pair, rather than validating each attribute individually. You cannot configure IP+MAC SAV with IP SAV. 1.
PAGE 271
Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) 13 Equal cost multi-path (ECMP) is supported on theZ9000 platform. ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity is available on theZ9000platform. Flow-based affinity includes the following: • Link Bundle Monitoring Configuring the Hash Algorithm TeraScale has one algorithm that is used for link aggregation groups (LAGs), ECMP, and NH-ECMP, and ExaScale can use three different algorithms for each of these features.
PAGE 272
CONFIGURATION mode. ipv6 ecmp-deterministic Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
PAGE 273
NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when the user configures multipath routes to the same network. The system can generate a maximum of 512 unique ecmp-groups. The ecmp-group indexes are generated in even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6... 1022) and are for information only. For link bundle monitoring with ECMP, the ecmp-group command is used to enable the link bundle monitoring feature. The ecmp-group with id 2, enabled for link bundle monitoring is user configured.
PAGE 274
Creating an ECMP Group Bundle Within each ECMP group, you can specify an interface. If you enable monitoring for the ECMP group, the utilization calculation is performed when the average utilization of the link-bundle (as opposed to a single link within the bundle) exceeds 60%. 1. Create a user-defined ECMP group bundle. CONFIGURATION mode ecmp-group ecmp-group-id The range is from 1 to 64. 2. Add interfaces to the ECMP group bundle.
PAGE 275
Dell(conf-ecmp-group-5)#show config ! ecmp-group 5 interface tengigabitethernet 0/2 interface tengigabitethernet 0/3 link-bundle-monitor enable Dell(conf-ecmp-group-5)# Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) 275
PAGE 276
PAGE 277
Enabling FIPS Cryptography 14 Federal information processing standard (FIPS) cryptography is supported on the Z9000 platform. This chapter describes how to enable FIPS cryptography requirements on Dell Networking platforms. This feature provides cryptographic algorithms conforming to various FIPS standards published by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), a non-regulatory agency of the US Department of Commerce.
PAGE 278
Enabling FIPS Mode To enable or disable FIPS mode, use the console port. Secure the host attached to the console port against unauthorized access. Any attempts to enable or disable FIPS mode from a virtual terminal session are denied. When you enable FIPS mode, the following actions are taken: • If enabled, the SSH server is disabled. • All open SSH and Telnet sessions, as well as all SCP and FTP file transfers, are closed.
PAGE 279
Monitoring FIPS Mode Status To view the status of the current FIPS mode (enabled/disabled), use the following commands. • Use either command to view the status of the current FIPS mode. show fips status show system Example of the show fips status Command Example of the show system Command Dell#show fips status FIPS Mode : Enabled for the system using the show system command.
PAGE 280
• To disable FIPS mode from a console port. CONFIGURATION mode no fips mode enable The following Warning message displays: WARNING: Disabling FIPS mode will close all SSH/Telnet connections, restart those servers, and destroy all configured host keys.
PAGE 281
Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) 15 Force10 resilient ring protocol (FRRP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses.
PAGE 282
The Member VLAN is the VLAN used to transmit data as described earlier. The Control VLAN is used to perform the health checks on the ring. The Control VLAN can always pass through all ports in the ring, including the secondary port of the Master node. Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure.
PAGE 283
Multiple FRRP Rings Up to 255 rings are allowed per system and multiple rings can be run on one system. More than the recommended number of rings may cause interface instability. You can configure multiple rings with a single switch connection; a single ring can have multiple FRRP groups; multiple rings can be connected with a common link. Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch A member VLAN can span two rings interconnected by a common switch, in a figure-eight style topology.
PAGE 284
Concept Explanation Control VLAN Each ring has a unique Control VLAN through which tagged ring health frames (RHF) are sent. Control VLANs are used only for sending RHF, and cannot be used for any other purpose. Member VLAN Each ring maintains a list of member VLANs. Member VLANs must be consistent across the entire ring. Port Role Each node has two ports for each ring: Primary and Secondary. The Master node Primary port generates RHFs. The Master node Secondary port receives the RHFs.
PAGE 285
Concept Explanation There is no periodic transmission of TCRHFs. The TCRHFs are sent on triggered events of ring failure or ring restoration only. Implementing FRRP • FRRP is media and speed independent. • FRRP is a Dell proprietary protocol that does not interoperate with any other vendor. • You must disable the spanning tree protocol (STP) on both the Primary and Secondary interfaces before you can enable FRRP. • All ring ports must be Layer 2 ports.
PAGE 286
Configuring the Control VLAN Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as control or member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to Layer 2. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • You can only add ring nodes to the VLAN. • A control VLAN can belong to one FRRP group only. • Tag control VLAN ports.
PAGE 287
3. Assign the Primary and Secondary ports and the control VLAN for the ports on the ring. CONFIG-FRRP mode. interface primary int slot/port secondary int slot/port control-vlan vlan id Interface: • For a 10/100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 288
To create the Members VLANs for this FRRP group, use the following commands on all of the Transit switches in the ring. 1. Create a VLAN with this ID number. CONFIGURATION mode. interface vlan vlan-id VLAN ID: the range is from 1 to 4094. 2. Tag the specified interface or range of interfaces to this VLAN. CONFIG-INT-VLAN mode. tagged interface slot/port {range} Interface: • Slot/Port, range: Slot and Port ID for the interface. The range is entered Slot/Port-Port.
PAGE 289
5. Identify the Member VLANs for this FRRP group. CONFIG-FRRP mode. member-vlan vlan-id {range} VLAN-ID, Range: VLAN IDs for the ring’s Member VLANs. 6. Enable this FRRP group on this switch. CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. • Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode.
PAGE 290
• Show the information for the identified FRRP group. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp ring-id • Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Show the state of all FRRP groups. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • • • • • • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN.
PAGE 291
no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/24,34 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary GigabitEthernet 1/24 secondary GigabitEthernet 1/34 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode master no disable interface GigabitEthernet 2/14 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! protocol frrp
PAGE 292
secondary GigabitEthernet 3/14 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable 292 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)
PAGE 293
16 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) GARP VLAN registration protocol (GVRP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Typical virtual local area network (VLAN) implementation involves manually configuring each Layer 2 switch that participates in a given VLAN. GVRP, defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
PAGE 294
Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-by-switch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, that type of port is referred to as a VLAN trunk port, but it is not necessary to specifically identify to the Dell Networking OS that the port is a trunk port. Figure 30.
PAGE 295
• Configure a GARP Timer Enabling GVRP Globally To configure GVRP globally, use the following command. • Enable GVRP for the entire switch. CONFIGURATION mode gvrp enable Example of Configuring GVRP Dell(conf)#protocol gvrp Dell(config-gvrp)#no disable Dell(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable Dell(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command.
PAGE 296
not be unconfigured when it receives a Leave PDU. Therefore, the registration mode on that interface is FIXED. • Forbidden Mode — Disables the port to dynamically register VLANs and to propagate VLAN information except information about VLAN 1. A port with forbidden registration type thus allows only VLAN 1 to pass through even though the PDU carries information for more VLANs.
PAGE 297
LeaveAll Timer Dell(conf)# 5000 Dell Networking OS displays this message if an attempt is made to configure an invalid GARP timer: Dell(conf)#garp timers join 300 % Error: Leave timer should be >= 3*Join timer.
PAGE 298
PAGE 299
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) 17 Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. IGMP is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group.
PAGE 300
Figure 31. IGMP Messages in IP Packets Join a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group: it may respond to a general query from its querier or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier. Responding to an IGMP Query The following describes how a host can join a multicast group. 1. One router on a subnet is elected as the querier. The querier periodically multicasts (to all-multicastsystems address 224.0.0.1) a general query to all hosts on the subnet. 2.
PAGE 301
response, the querier removes the group from the list associated with forwarding port and stops forwarding traffic for that group to the subnet. IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2. However, there are differences. • Version 3 adds the ability to filter by multicast source, which helps multicast routing protocols avoid forwarding traffic to subnets where there are no interested receivers.
PAGE 302
Figure 33. IGMP Version 3–Capable Multicast Routers Address Structure Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1. The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2. The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1.
PAGE 303
Figure 34. Membership Reports: Joining and Filtering Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1. Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary. 2.
PAGE 304
Figure 35. Membership Queries: Leaving and Staying Configure IGMP Configuring IGMP is a two-step process. 1. Enable multicast routing using the ip multicast-routing command. 2. Enable a multicast routing protocol.
PAGE 305
• Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes • Designating a Multicast Router Interface Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. • View IGMP-enabled interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface Example of the show ip igmp interface Command Dell#show ip igmp interface gig 7/16 GigabitEthernet 7/16 is up, line protocol is up Internet address is 10.87.3.
PAGE 306
IGMP version is 3 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/13)# Viewing IGMP Groups To view both learned and statically configured IGMP groups, use the following command. • View both learned and statically configured IGMP groups. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp groups Example of the show ip igmp groups Command Dell(conf-if-gi-1/0)#do sho ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Uptime 224.1.1.1 GigabitEthernet 1/0 00:00:03 224.1.2.
PAGE 307
INTERFACE mode • ip igmp query-interval Adjust the maximum response time. INTERFACE mode • ip igmp query-max-resp-time Adjust the last member query interval. INTERFACE mode ip igmp last-member-query-interval Adjusting the IGMP Querier Timeout Value If there is more than one multicast router on a subnet, only one is elected to be the querier, which is the router that sends queries to the subnet. 1. Routers send queries to the all multicast systems address, 224.0.0.1.
PAGE 308
Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave If the querier does not receive a response to a group-specific or group-and-source query, it sends another (querier robustness value). Then, after no response, it removes the group from the outgoing interface for the subnet. IGMP immediate leave reduces leave latency by enabling a router to immediately delete the group membership on an interface after receiving a Leave message (it does not send any group-specific or group-and-source queries before deleting the entry).
PAGE 309
• View the configuration. CONFIGURATION mode • show running-config Disable snooping on a VLAN.
PAGE 310
• Configure the switch to only forward unregistered packets to ports on a VLAN that are connected to mrouter ports. CONFIGURATION mode no ip igmp snooping flood Specifying a Port as Connected to a Multicast Router To statically specify or view a port in a VLAN, use the following commands. • Statically specify a port in a VLAN as connected to a multicast router. INTERFACE VLAN mode • ip igmp snooping mrouter View the ports that are connected to multicast routers. EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 311
ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes The following describes the fast convergence feature. When a port transitions to the Forwarding state as a result of an STP or MSTP topology change, Dell Networking OS sends a general query out of all ports except the multicast router ports. The host sends a response to the general query and the forwarding database is updated without having to wait for the query interval to expire.
PAGE 312
One typical example is an SSH session to an unknown destination or an SSH connection that is destined to the management port IP address. The management default route can coexist with front-end default routes. If SSH is specified as a management application, SSH links to and from an unknown destination uses the management default route.
PAGE 313
The switch also processes user-specified port numbers for applications such as RADIUS, TACACS, SSH, and sFlow. The OS maintains a list of configured management applications and their port numbers. You can configure two default routes, one configured on the management port and the other on the frontend port. Two tables, namely, Egress Interface Selection routing table and default routing table, are maintained.
PAGE 314
• If ping and traceroute are destined to the management port IP address, the response traffic for these packets is sent by doing route lookup in the EIS routing table. When the feature is disabled using the no management egress-interface-selection command, the following operations are performed: • All management application configuration is removed. • All routes installed in the management EIS routing table are removed.
PAGE 315
• If the route lookup in the EIS routing table fails or if management port is down, then packets are dropped. The application-specific count of the dropped packets is incremented and is viewed using the show management application pkt-drop-cntr command. This counter is cleared using clear management application pkt-drop-cntr command. • Packets whose destination TCP/UDP port does not match a configured management application, take the regular route lookup flow in the IP stack.
PAGE 316
the destination. The fallback route between the management and data networks is used in such a case. At any given time, end users can access Dell Networking OS applications using either ip1 or ip2. Return traffic for such end-user-originated sessions destined to management port ip1 is handled using the EIS route lookup. Handling of Transit Traffic (Traffic Separation) This is forwarded traffic where destination IP is not an IP address configured in the switch.
PAGE 317
Transit Traffic This phenomenon occurs where traffic is transiting the switch. Traffic has not originated from the switch and is not terminating on the switch. • Drop the packets that are received on the front-end data port with destination on the management port. • Drop the packets that received on the management port with destination as the front-end data port. Switch-Destined Traffic This phenomenon occurs where traffic is terminated on the switch.
PAGE 318
Protocol Behavior when EIS is Enabled Behavior when EIS is Disabled dns EIS Behavior Default Behavior ftp EIS Behavior Default Behavior ntp EIS Behavior Default Behavior radius EIS Behavior Default Behavior Sflow-collector Default Behavior Snmp (SNMP Mib response and SNMP Traps) EIS Behavior Default Behavior ssh EIS Behavior Default Behavior syslog EIS Behavior Default Behavior tacacs EIS Behavior Default Behavior telnet EIS Behavior Default Behavior tftp EIS Behavior Defau
PAGE 319
Default Behavior: Route lookup is done in the default routing table and appropriate egress port is selected.
PAGE 320
Designating a Multicast Router Interface To designate an interface as a multicast router interface, use the following command. Dell Networking OS also has the capability of listening in on the incoming IGMP general queries and designate those interfaces as the multicast router interface when the frames have a non-zero IP source address. All IGMP control packets and IP multicast data traffic originating from receivers is forwarded to multicast router interfaces.
PAGE 321
Interfaces 18 This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell Networking Operating System (OS). • 10 Gigabit Ethernet / 40 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces are supported on the Z9000 platform.
PAGE 322
Interface Types The following table describes different interface types.
PAGE 323
Dell#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 1/0 TenGigabitEthernet 1/0 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f3:6a Current address is 00:01:e8:05:f3:6a Pluggable media present, XFP type is 10GBASE-LR. Medium is MultiRate, Wavelength is 1310nm XFP receive power reading is -3.7685 Interface index is 67436603 Internet address is 65.113.24.
PAGE 324
! interface GigabitEthernet no ip address shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet no ip address shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet no ip address shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet no ip address shutdown 9/6 9/7 9/8 9/9 Enabling a Physical Interface After determining the type of physical interfaces available, to enable and configure the interfaces, enter INTERFACE mode by using the interface interface slot/port command. 1.
PAGE 325
Dell Networking OS Behavior: The Z9000 system uses a single MAC address for all physical interfaces. Configuration Task List for Physical Interfaces By default, all interfaces are operationally disabled and traffic does not pass through them.
PAGE 326
Example of a Basic Layer 2 Interface Configuration Dell(conf-if)#show config ! interface Port-channel 1 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if)# Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode To configure an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode • no shutdown Place the interface in Layer 2 (switching) mode. INTERFACE mode switchport For information about enabling and configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol, refer to Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
PAGE 327
no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if)#ip address 10.10.1.1 /24 % Error: Port is in Layer 2 mode Gi 1/2. Dell(conf-if)# To determine the configuration of an interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or the various show interface commands in EXEC mode. Configuring Layer 3 (Interface) Mode To assign an IP address, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode • no shutdown Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface.
PAGE 328
attacks on front-end ports. The following protocols support EIS: DNS, FTP, NTP, RADIUS, sFlow, SNMP, SSH, Syslog, TACACS, Telnet, and TFTP. This feature does not support sFlow on stacked units. When you enable this feature, all management routes (connected, static, and default) are copied to the management EIS routing table. Use the management route command to add new management routes to the default and EIS routing tables. Use the show ip management-eis-route command to view the EIS routes.
PAGE 329
• Enter the slot and the port (0) to configure a Management interface. CONFIGURATION mode interface managementethernet interface • The slot range is 0. Configure an IP address and mask on a Management interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask – ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in / prefix format (/x). Configuring Management Interfaces on the S-Series You can manage the S-Series from any port.
PAGE 330
Gateway of last resort is 10.11.131.254 to network 0.0.0.0 Destination ----------*S 0.0.0.0/0 C 10.11.130.0/23 Dell# Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change ----------------- ----------via 10.11.131.254, Gi 0/48 1/0 1d2h Direct, Gi 0/48 0/0 1d2h VLAN Interfaces VLANs are logical interfaces and are, by default, in Layer 2 mode. Physical interfaces and port channels can be members of VLANs. For more information about VLANs and Layer 2, refer to Layer 2 and Virtual LANs (VLANs).
PAGE 331
Loopback Interfaces A Loopback interface is a virtual interface in which the software emulates an interface. Packets routed to it are processed locally. Because this interface is not a physical interface, you can configure routing protocols on this interface to provide protocol stability. You can place Loopback interfaces in default Layer 3 mode. To configure, view, or delete a Loopback interface, use the following commands. • Enter a number as the Loopback interface.
PAGE 332
Port Channel Definition and Standards Link aggregation is defined by IEEE 802.3ad as a method of grouping multiple physical interfaces into a single logical interface—a link aggregation group (LAG) or port channel. A LAG is “a group of links that appear to a MAC client as if they were a single link” according to IEEE 802.3ad. In Dell Networking OS, a LAG is referred to as a port channel interface. A port channel provides redundancy by aggregating physical interfaces into one logical interface.
PAGE 333
at 1000 Mbps are kept up, and all 10/100/1000 interfaces that are not set to 1000 speed or auto negotiate are disabled. Dell Networking OS brings up 10/100/1000 interfaces that are set to auto negotiate so that their speed is identical to the speed of the first channel member in the port channel. 10/100/1000 Mbps Interfaces in Port Channels When both 10/100/1000 interfaces and GigE interfaces are added to a port channel, the interfaces must share a common speed.
PAGE 334
Creating a Port Channel You can create up to 128 port channels with eight port members per group on the Z9000 . To configure a port channel, use the following commands. 1. Create a port channel. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number 2. Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown After you enable the port channel, you can place it in Layer 2 or Layer 3 mode.
PAGE 335
To add a physical interface to a port, use the following commands. 1. Add the interface to a port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface The interface variable is the physical interface type and slot/port information. 2. Double check that the interface was added to the port channel.
PAGE 336
Output 81.60Mbits/sec, 133658 packets/sec Time since last interface status change: 04:31:57 Dell> When more than one interface is added to a Layer 2-port channel, Dell Networking OS selects one of the active interfaces in the port channel to be the primary port. The primary port replies to flooding and sends protocol data units (PDUs). An asterisk in the show interfaces port-channel brief command indicates the primary port.
PAGE 337
Dell(conf-if-portch)#show config ! interface Port-channel 4 no ip address channel-member GigabitEthernet 1/8 no shutdown Dell(conf-if-portch)#no chann gi 1/8 Dell(conf-if-portch)#int port 5 Dell(conf-if-portch)#channel gi 1/8 Dell(conf-if-portch)#sho conf ! interface Port-channel 5 no ip address channel-member GigabitEthernet 1/8 shutdown Dell(conf-if-portch)# Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel You can configure the minimum links in a port channel (LAG) that must be in “oper up” status
PAGE 338
• Remove the port channel with tagging enabled from the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no tagged port-channel id number or • no untagged port-channel id number Identify which port channels are members of VLANs. EXEC Privilege mode show vlan Configuring VLAN Tags for Member Interfaces To configure and verify VLAN tags for individual members of a port channel, perform the following: 1. Configure VLAN membership on individual ports INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if-te-0/2)#vlan tagged 2,3-4 2.
PAGE 339
ip address ip-address mask [secondary] – ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash format (/24). – secondary: the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. Deleting or Disabling a Port Channel To delete or disable a port channel, use the following commands. • Delete a port channel. CONFIGURATION mode • no interface portchannel channel-number Disable a port channel.
PAGE 340
[no] load-balance {ip-selection [dest-ip | source-ip]} | {mac [dest-mac | source-dest-mac | source-mac]} | {tcp-udp enable} {ipv6-selection} {tunnel}| {ingress-port} You can select one, two, or all three of the following basic hash methods: – ip-selection [dest-ip | source-ip] — Distribute IP traffic based on the IP destination or source address.
PAGE 341
Example of the hash-algorithm Command Dell(conf)#hash-algorithm ecmp xor 26 lag crc 26 nh-ecmp checksum 26 Dell(conf)# The hash-algorithm command is specific to ECMP group. The default ECMP hash configuration is crclower. This command takes the lower 32 bits of the hash key to compute the egress port.
PAGE 342
The show configuration command is also available under Interface Range mode. This command allows you to display the running configuration only for interfaces that are part of interface range. Bulk Configuration Examples Use the interface range command for bulk configuration. • Create a Single-Range • Create a Multiple-Range • Exclude Duplicate Entries • Exclude a Smaller Port Range • Overlap Port Ranges • Commas • Add Ranges Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range.
PAGE 343
Overlap Port Ranges The following is an example showing how the interface-range prompt extends a port range from the smallest start port number to the largest end port number when port ranges overlap. handles overlapping port ranges.
PAGE 344
Choosing an Interface-Range Macro To use an interface-range macro, use the following command. • Selects the interfaces range to be configured using the values saved in a named interface-range macro. CONFIGURATION mode interface range macro name Example of Using a Macro to Change the Interface Range Configuration Mode The following example shows how to change to the interface-range configuration mode using the interface-range macro named “test.
PAGE 345
Monitor time: 00:00:00 Refresh Intvl.
PAGE 346
To test and display TDR results, use the following commands. 1. To test for cable faults on the GigabitEthernet cable. EXEC Privilege mode tdr-cable-test gigabitethernet / Between two ports, do not start the test on both ends of the cable. Enable the interface before starting the test. Enable the port to run the test or the test prints an error message. 2. Displays TDR test results.
PAGE 347
• The system must be reloaded after issuing the CLI for the change to take effect. Link Dampening Interface state changes occur when interfaces are administratively brought up or down or if an interface state changes. Every time an interface changes a state or flaps, routing protocols are notified of the status of the routes that are affected by the change in state. These protocols go through the momentous task of reconverging.
PAGE 348
Dell# show interfaces dampening InterfaceStateFlapsPenaltyHalf-LifeReuseSuppressMax-Sup Gi 0/0Up005750250020 Gi 0/1Up21200205001500300 Gi 0/2Down4850306002000120 To view a dampening summary for the entire system, use the show interfaces dampening summary command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell# show interfaces dampening summary 20 interfaces are configured with dampening. 3 interfaces are currently suppressed.
PAGE 349
Transmission Media MTU Range (in bytes) Ethernet 594-12000 = link MTU 576-9234 = IP MTU Link Bundle Monitoring Link bundle monitoring is supported only on the platform. Monitoring linked LAG bundles allows traffic distribution amounts in a link to be monitored for unfair distribution at any given time. A threshold of 60% is defined as an acceptable amount of traffic on a member link. Links are monitored in 15-second intervals for three consecutive instances.
PAGE 350
Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on Ethernet interfaces. The default is rx off tx off. INTERFACE mode. flowcontrol rx [off | on] tx [off | on] Where: rx on: Processes the received flow control frames on this port. rx off: Ignores the received flow control frames on this port. tx on: Sends control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received.
PAGE 351
The flow control sender and receiver must be on the same port-pipe. Flow control is not supported across different port-pipes. To enable pause frames, use the following command. • Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on 1 and 10Gig line cards. INTERFACE mode flowcontrol rx [off | on] tx [off | on] [threshold {<1-2047> <1-2013> <1-2013>}] – rx on: enter the keywords rx on to process the received flow control frames on this port.
PAGE 352
• All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value. • The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members. For example, if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the port channel’s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU. VLANs: • All members of a VLAN must have the same IP MTU value. • Members can have different Link MTU values.
PAGE 353
Setting the Speed and Duplex Mode of Ethernet Interfaces To discover whether the remote and local interface requires manual speed synchronization, and to manually synchronize them if necessary, use the following command sequence. 1. Determine the local interface status. Refer to the following example. EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces [interface | linecard slot-number] status 2. Determine the remote interface status.
PAGE 354
Gi 0/1 Down Gi 0/2 Down Gi 0/3 Down Gi 0/4 Force10Port Up Gi 0/5 Down Gi 0/6 Down Gi 0/7 Up Gi 0/8 Down Gi 0/9 Down Gi 0/10 Down Gi 0/11 Down Gi 0/12 Down [output omitted] Auto Auto Auto 1000 Mbit Auto Auto 1000 Mbit Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto 1 1 -30-130 --1502,1504,1506-1508,1602 ------ In the previous example, several ports display “Auto” in the Speed field, including port 0/1.
PAGE 355
Adjusting the Keepalive Timer To change the time interval between keepalive messages on the interfaces, use the keepalive command. The interface sends keepalive messages to itself to test network connectivity on the interface. To change the default time interval between keepalive messages, use the following command. • Change the default interval between keepalive messages. INTERFACE mode • keepalive [seconds] View the new setting.
PAGE 356
802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 Name: GigabitEthernet 13/3 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Vlan 2 --More-- Configuring the Interface Sampling Size Although you can enter any value between 30 and 299 seconds (the default), software polling is done once every 15 seconds. So, for example, if you enter “19”, you actually get a sample of the past 15 seconds. All LAG members inherit the rate interval configuration from the LAG.
PAGE 357
TenGigabitEthernet 10/0 is down, line protocol is down Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:01:9e:d9 Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 1d23h45m Queueing strategy: fifo 0 packets input, 0 bytes Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol
PAGE 358
EXEC Privilege mode clear counters [interface] [vrrp [vrid] | learning-limit] (OPTIONAL) Enter the following interface keywords and slot/port or number information: – For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. – For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. – For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 359
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) 19 Internet protocol security (IPSec) is available on the Z9000 platform. IPSec is an end-to-end security scheme for protecting IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a communication session. Use IPSec between hosts, between gateways, or between hosts and gateways. IPSec is compatible with Telnet and FTP protocols. It supports two operational modes: Transport and Tunnel.
PAGE 360
Configuring IPSec The following sample configuration shows how to configure FTP and telnet for IPSec. 1. Define the transform set. CONFIGURATION mode crypto ipsec transform-set myXform-seta esp-authentication md5 espencryption des 2. Define the crypto policy.
PAGE 361
IPv4 Routing 20 IPv4 routing is supported on the Z9000 platform. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell Networking OS.
PAGE 362
• • • Assigning IP Addresses to an Interface (mandatory) Configuring Static Routes (optional) Configure Static Routes for the Management Interface (optional) For a complete listing of all commands related to IP addressing, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide.
PAGE 363
interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown ! Dell(conf-if)# Dell(conf-if)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown ! Dell(conf-if)# Configuring Static Routes A static route is an IP address that you manually configure and that the routing protocol does not learn, such as open shortest path first (OSPF). Often, static routes are used as backup routes in case other dynamically learned routes are unreachable.
PAGE 364
S 6.1.2.7/32 S 6.1.2.8/32 S 6.1.2.9/32 S 6.1.2.10/32 S 6.1.2.11/32 S 6.1.2.12/32 S 6.1.2.13/32 S 6.1.2.14/32 S 6.1.2.15/32 S 6.1.2.16/32 S 6.1.2.17/32 S 11.1.1.0/24 Direct, Lo 0 --More-- via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.
PAGE 365
S S S S S S S S S S 6.1.2.9/32 6.1.2.10/32 6.1.2.11/32 6.1.2.12/32 6.1.2.13/32 6.1.2.14/32 6.1.2.15/32 6.1.2.16/32 6.1.2.17/32 11.1.1.0/24 --More-- via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.
PAGE 366
Using the Configured Source IP Address in ICMP Messages This feature is supported on the Z9000 platform. ICMP error or unreachable messages are now sent with the configured IP address of the source interface instead of the front-end port IP address as the source IP address. Enable the generation of ICMP unreachable messages through the ip unreachable command in Interface mode.
PAGE 367
To configure the duration for which the device waits for the ACK packet to be sent from the requesting host to establish the TCP connection, perform the following steps: 1. Define the wait duration in seconds for the TCP connection to be established. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#ip tcp reduced-syn-ack-wait <9-75> You can use the no ip tcp reduced-syn-ack-wait command to restore the default behavior, which causes the wait period to be set as 8 seconds. 2.
PAGE 368
• Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use. Example of the show hosts Command To view current bindings, use the show hosts command. Dell>show host Default domain is force10networks.com Name/address lookup uses domain service Name servers are not set Host Flags TTL Type Address -------- ----- ------- ------ks (perm, OK) - IP 2.2.2.2 patch1 (perm, OK) - IP 192.68.69.
PAGE 369
• Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode • ip domain-lookup Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] • The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use.
PAGE 370
In Dell Networking OS, Proxy ARP enables hosts with knowledge of the network to accept and forward packets from hosts that contain no knowledge of the network. Proxy ARP makes it possible for hosts to be ignorant of the network, including subnetting. For more information about Proxy ARP, refer to RFC 925, Multi-LAN Address Resolution, and RFC 1027, Using ARP to Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways.
PAGE 371
Enabling Proxy ARP By default, Proxy ARP is enabled. To disable Proxy ARP, use the no proxy-arp command in the interface mode. To re-enable Proxy ARP, use the following command. • Re-enable Proxy ARP. INTERFACE mode ip proxy-arp To view if Proxy ARP is enabled on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If it is not listed in the show config command output, it is enabled. Only non-default information is displayed in the show config command output.
PAGE 372
• inform switches of their presence on a port so that packets can be forwarded • update the ARP table of other nodes on the network in case of an address change In the request, the host uses its own IP address in the Sender Protocol Address and Target Protocol Address fields. In Dell Networking OS versions prior to 8.3.1.0, if a gratuitous ARP is received some time after an ARP request is sent, only RP2 installs the ARP information. For example: 1.
PAGE 373
Figure 37. ARP Learning via ARP Request with ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Enabled Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP. It only updates the ARP entry for the Layer 3 interface with the source IP of the request. Configuring ARP Retries In Dell Networking OS versions prior to 8.3.1.0, the number of ARP retries is set to five and is not configurable.
PAGE 374
ICMP For diagnostics, the internet control message protocol (ICMP) provides routing information to end stations by choosing the best route (ICMP redirect messages) or determining if a router is reachable (ICMP Echo or Echo Reply). ICMP error messages inform the router of problems in a particular packet. These messages are sent only on unicast traffic. Configuration Tasks for ICMP The following lists the configuration tasks for ICMP.
PAGE 375
2. Configure a broadcast address on interfaces that will receive UDP broadcast traffic. Refer to Configuring a Broadcast Address. Important Points to Remember • The existing ip directed broadcast command is rendered meaningless if you enable UDP helper on the same interface. • The broadcast traffic rate should not exceed 200 packets per second when you enable UDP helper. • You may specify a maximum of 16 UDP ports.
PAGE 376
Example of Configuring a Broadcast Address Example of Viewing Configured Broadcast Addresses Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 100 ip address 1.1.0.1/24 ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 untagged GigabitEthernet 1/2 no shutdown To view the configured broadcast address for an interface, use show interfaces command.
PAGE 377
1. It is flooded on VLAN 101 without changing the destination address because the forwarding process is Layer 2. 2. If you enabled UDP helper, the system changes the destination IP address to the configured broadcast address 1.1.255.255 and forwards the packet to VLAN 100. 3. Packet 2 is also forwarded to the ingress interface with an unchanged destination address because it does not have broadcast address configured. Figure 38.
PAGE 378
UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses Incoming packets with a destination IP address matching the configured broadcast address of any interface are forwarded to the matching interfaces. In the following illustration, Packet 1 has a destination IP address that matches the configured broadcast address of VLAN 100 and 101. If you enabled UDP helper and the UDP port number matches, the packet is flooded on both VLANs with an unchanged destination address. Packet 2 is sent from a host on VLAN 101.
PAGE 379
When using the IP helper and UDP helper on the same interface, use the debug ip dhcp command. Example Output from the debug ip dhcp Command Packet 0.0.0.0:68 -> 255.255.255.255:67 TTL 128 2005-11-05 11:59:35 %RELAY-I-PACKET, BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 172.21.50.193 BOOTP Request, XID = 0x9265f901, secs = 0 hwaddr = 00:02:2D:8D: 46:DC, giaddr = 0.0.0.0, hops = 2 2005-11-05 11:59:35 %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST, Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:02:2D:8D: 46:DC to 137.138.17.
PAGE 380
PAGE 381
IPv6 Routing 21 Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is supported on the Z9000 platform. NOTE: The IPv6 basic commands are supported on all platforms. However, not all features are supported on all platforms, nor for all releases. To determine the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) version supporting which features and platforms, refer to Implementing IPv6 with Dell Networking OS. IPv6 is the successor to IPv4.
PAGE 382
NOTE: Dell Networking OS provides the flexibility to add prefixes on Router Advertisements (RA) to advertise responses to Router Solicitations (RS). By default, RA response messages are sent when an RS message is received. Dell Networking OS manipulation of IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration supports the router side only. Neighbor discovery (ND) messages are advertised so the neighbor can use this information to autoconfigure its address. However, received ND messages are not used to create an IPv6 address.
PAGE 383
IPv6 Header Fields The 40 bytes of the IPv6 header are ordered, as shown in the following illustration. Figure 41. IPv6 Header Fields Version (4 bits) The Version field always contains the number 6, referring to the packet’s IP version. Traffic Class (8 bits) The Traffic Class field deals with any data that needs special handling. These bits define the packet priority and are defined by the packet Source. Sending and forwarding routers use this field to identify different IPv6 classes and priorities.
PAGE 384
The following lists the Next Header field values. Value Description 0 Hop-by-Hop option header 4 IPv4 6 TCP 8 Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP) 41 IPv6 43 Routing header 44 Fragmentation header 50 Encrypted Security 51 Authentication header 59 No Next Header 60 Destinations option header NOTE: This table is not a comprehensive list of Next Header field values. For a complete and current listing, refer to the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) web page at .
PAGE 385
However, if the Destination Address is a Hop-by-Hop options header, the Extension header is examined by every forwarding router along the packet’s route. The Hop-by-Hop options header must immediately follow the IPv6 header, and is noted by the value 0 (zero) in the Next Header field. Extension headers are processed in the order in which they appear in the packet header. Hop-by-Hop Options Header The Hop-by-Hop options header contains information that is examined by every router along the packet’s path.
PAGE 386
of double colons is supported in a single address. Any number of consecutive 0000 groups may be reduced to two colons, as long as there is only one double colon used in an address. Leading and/or trailing zeros in a group can also be omitted (as in ::1 for localhost, 1:: for network addresses and :: for unspecified addresses). All the addresses in the following list are all valid and equivalent.
PAGE 387
Implementing IPv6 with Dell Networking OS Dell Networking OS supports both IPv4 and IPv6 and both may be used simultaneously in your system. The following table lists the Dell Networking OS version in which an IPv6 feature became available for each platform. The sections following the table give greater detail about the feature. Feature and Functionality Dell Networking OS Release Introduction Documentation and Chapter Location Z9000 Basic IPv6 Commands 8.3.
PAGE 388
Feature and Functionality Dell Networking OS Release Introduction Documentation and Chapter Location Z9000 IS-IS for IPv6 8.3.11 Intermediate System to Intermediate System IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. IS-IS for IPv6 support for 8.3.11 redistribution Intermediate System to Intermediate System IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. ISIS for IPv6 support for distribute lists and administrative distance 8.3.11 OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) 8.
PAGE 389
Feature and Functionality Dell Networking OS Release Introduction Documentation and Chapter Location Z9000 (outbound SSH) Layer 3 only Secure Shell (SSH) server 8.3.11 support over IPv6 (inbound SSH) Layer 3 only Secure Shell (SSH) Over an IPv6 Transport IPv6 Access Control Lists 8.3.11 IPv6 Access Control Lists in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. N/A IPv6 PIM in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 390
Figure 42. Path MTU Discovery Process IPv6 Neighbor Discovery IPv6 neighbor discovery protocol (NDP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. NDP is a top-level protocol for neighbor discovery on an IPv6 network. In lieu of address resolution protocol (ARP), NDP uses “Neighbor Solicitation” and “Neighbor Advertisement” ICMPv6 messages for determining relationships between neighboring nodes.
PAGE 391
Figure 43. NDP Router Redirect IPv6 Neighbor Discovery of MTU Packets You can set the MTU advertised through the RA packets to incoming routers, without altering the actual MTU setting on the interface. The ipv6 nd mtu command sets the value advertised to routers. It does not set the actual MTU rate. For example, if you set ipv6 nd mtu to 1280, the interface still passes 1500-byte packets, if that is what is set with the mtu command.
PAGE 392
• Clearing IPv6 Routes Adjusting Your CAM-Profile The cam-acl command is supported on the Z9000 platform. Although adjusting your CAM-profile is not a mandatory step, if you plan to implement IPv6 ACLs, adjust your CAM settings. The CAM space is allotted in FP blocks. The total space allocated must equal 13 FP blocks. There are 16 FP blocks, but the System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated. You must enter the ipv6acl allocation as a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).
PAGE 393
You can configure up to two IPv6 addresses on management interfaces, allowing required default router support on the management port that is acting as host, per RFC 4861. Data ports support more than two IPv6 addresses. When you configure IPv6 addresses on multiple interfaces (the ipv6 address command) and verify the configuration (the show ipv6 interfaces command), the same link local (fe80) address is displayed for each IPv6 interface. • Enter the IPv6 Address for the device.
PAGE 394
Configuring Telnet with IPv6 IPv6 telnet is supported on the Z9000 platform. The Telnet client and server in Dell Networking OS supports IPv6 connections. You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router using an IPv6 Telnet client, or you can initiate an IPv6 Telnet connection from the router. • Enter the IPv6 Address for the device. EXEC mode or EXEC Privileged mode telnet ipv6 address – ipv6 address: x:x:x:x::x – mask: prefix length is from 0 to 128.
PAGE 395
mroute neighbors ospf pim prefix-list route rpf Dell# IPv6 multicast-routing table IPv6 neighbor information OSPF information PIM V6 information List IPv6 prefix lists IPv6 routing information RPF table Showing an IPv6 Interface To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use the following command. • Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface.
PAGE 396
ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND retransmit interval is 1000 milliseconds ND hop limit is 64 Showing IPv6 Routes To view the global IPv6 routing information, use the following command. • Show IPv6 routing information for the specified route type. EXEC mode show ipv6 route type The following keywords are available: – To display information about a network, enter ipv6 address (X:X:X:X::X). – To display information about a host, enter hostname.
PAGE 397
C 601::/64 [0/0] Direct, Te 0/24, 00:34:18 C 912::/64 [0/0] Direct, Lo 2, 00:02:33 O IA 999::1/128 [110/2] via fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:3166, Te 0/24, 00:01:30 L fe80::/10 [0/0] Direct, Nu 0, 00:34:42 Dell# Dell#show ipv6 route static Destination Dist/Metric, Gateway, Last Change ----------------------------------------------------S 8888:9999:5555:6666:1111:2222::/96 [1/0] via 2222:2222:3333:3333::1, Gi 9/1, 00:03:16 S 9999:9999:9999:9999::/64 [1/0] via 8888:9999:5555:6666:1111:2222:3333:4444, 00:03:16 Showing
PAGE 398
– *: all routes. – ipv6 address: the format is x:x:x:x::x. – mask: the prefix length is from 0 to 128. NOTE: IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, where each group is separated by a colon (:). Omitting zeros is accepted as described in Addressing.
PAGE 399
Intermediate System to Intermediate System 22 Intermediate system to intermediate system (Is-IS) is supported on the Z9000 platform. • IS-IS is supported on the Z9000 with Dell Networking OS 9.0(0.0). • • The IS-IS protocol is an interior gateway protocol (IGP) that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS. • The IS-IS protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
PAGE 400
The NET length is variable, with a maximum of 20 bytes and a minimum of 8 bytes. It is composed of the following: • area address — within your routing domain or area, each area must have a unique area value. The first byte is called the authority and format indicator (AFI). • system address — the router’s MAC address. • N-selector — this is always 0. The following illustration is an example of the ISO-style address to show the address format IS-IS uses. In this example, the first five bytes (47.0005.
PAGE 401
Transition Mode All routers in the area or domain must use the same type of IPv6 support, either single-topology or multitopology. A router operating in multi-topology mode does not recognize the ability of the singletopology mode router to support IPv6 traffic, which leads to holes in the IPv6 topology.
PAGE 402
A new TLV (the Restart TLV) is introduced in the IIH PDUs, indicating that the router supports graceful restart. Timers Three timers are used to support IS-IS graceful restart functionality. After you enable graceful restart, these timers manage the graceful restart process. There are three times, T1, T2, and T3. • The T1 timer specifies the wait time before unacknowledged restart requests are generated.
PAGE 403
• Accepts external IPv6 information and advertises this information in the PDUs. The following table lists the default IS-IS values. Table 15.
PAGE 404
Enabling IS-IS By default, IS-IS is not enabled. The system supports one instance of IS-IS. To enable IS-IS globally, create an IS-IS routing process and assign a NET address. To exchange protocol information with neighbors, enable IS-IS on an interface, instead of on a network as with other routing protocols. In IS-IS, neighbors form adjacencies only when they are same IS type. For example, a Level 1 router never forms an adjacency with a Level 2 router.
PAGE 405
4. Enter an IPv4 Address. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask Assign an IP address and mask to the interface. The IP address must be on the same subnet as other IS-IS neighbors, but the IP address does not need to relate to the NET address. 5. Enter an IPv6 Address. INTERFACE mode ipv6 address ipv6-address mask • • ipv6 address: x:x:x:x::x mask: The prefix length is from 0 to 128.
PAGE 406
Generate narrow metrics: Accept narrow metrics: Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: Dell# level-1-2 level-1-2 none none To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 407
3. Set the minimum interval between SPF calculations. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode spf-interval [level-l | level-2 | interval] [initial_wait_interval [second_wait_interval]] Use this command for IPv6 route computation only when you enable multi-topology. If using singletopology mode, to apply to both IPv4 and IPv6 route computations, use the spf-interval command in CONFIG ROUTER ISIS mode. 4. Implement a wide metric-style globally.
PAGE 408
• – retry-times: number of times an unacknowledged restart request is sent before the restarting router gives up the graceful restart engagement with the neighbor. (The range is from 1 to 10 attempts. The default is 1.) Configure the time for the graceful restart timer T2 that a restarting router uses as the wait time for each database to synchronize.
PAGE 409
Database Sync count : 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2) Circuit GigabitEthernet 2/10: Mode: Normal L1-State:NORMAL, L2-State: NORMAL L1: Send/Receive: RR:0/0, RA: 0/0, SA:0/0 T1 time left: 0, retry count left:0 L2: Send/Receive: RR:0/0, RA: 0/0, SA:0/0 T1 time left: 0, retry count left:0 Dell# To view all interfaces configured with IS-IS routing along with the defaults, use the show isis interface command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 410
• Set the LSP refresh interval. ROUTER ISIS mode lsp-refresh-interval seconds – seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535. • The default is 900 seconds. Set the maximum time LSPs lifetime. ROUTER ISIS mode max-lsp-lifetime seconds – seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 1200 seconds. Example of Viewing IS-IS Configuration (ROUTER ISIS Mode) To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode or the show running-config isis command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 411
Metric Style Characteristics Cost Range Supported on IS-IS Interfaces transition Sends both wide (new) and narrow (old) TLVs. 0 to 63 narrow transition Sends narrow (old) TLVs and accepts both narrow (old) and wide (new) TLVs. 0 to 63 wide transition Sends wide (new) TLVs and accepts both narrow (old) and wide (new) TLVs. 0 to 16777215 To change the IS-IS metric style of the IS-IS process, use the following command. • Set the metric style for the IS-IS process.
PAGE 412
INTERFACE mode isis metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] – default-metric: the range is from 0 to 63 if the metric-style is narrow, narrow-transition, or transition. • The range is from 0 to 16777215 if the metric style is wide or wide transition. Assign a metric for an IPv6 link or interface. INTERFACE mode isis ipv6 metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] – default-metric: the range is from 0 to 63 for narrow and transition metric styles. The range is from 0 to 16777215 for wide metric styles.
PAGE 413
• Default is level-1-2. Change the IS-type for the IS-IS process. ROUTER ISIS mode is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2} Example of the show isis database Command to View Level 1-2 Link State Databases To view which IS-type is configured, use the show isis protocol command in EXEC Privilege mode. The show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode displays only non-default information. If you do not change the IS-type, the default value (level-1-2) is not displayed. The default is Level 1-2 router.
PAGE 414
Distribute Routes Another method of controlling routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. Prefix lists are applied to incoming or outgoing routes and routes must meet the conditions of the prefix lists or Dell Networking OS does not install the route in the routing table. The prefix lists are globally applied on all interfaces running IS-IS. Configure the prefix list in PREFIX LIST mode prior to assigning it to the IS-IS process.
PAGE 415
Applying IPv6 Routes To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing IPv6 routes, use the following commands. NOTE: These commands apply to IPv6 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv4 routes, use ROUTER ISIS mode, previously shown. • Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes.
PAGE 416
NOTE: These commands apply to IPv4 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv6 routes, use ADDRESSFAMILY IPV6 mode, shown later. • Include BGP, directly connected, RIP, or user-configured (static) routes in IS-IS. ROUTER ISIS mode redistribute {bgp as-number | connected | rip | static} [level-1 level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: – level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level.
PAGE 417
• – map-name: enter the name of a configured route map. Include specific OSPF routes in IS-IS.ROUTER ISIS mode redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric value] [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: – – – – – – – – process-id: the range is from 1 to 65535. level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2.
PAGE 418
Setting the Overload Bit Another use for the overload bit is to prevent other routers from using this router as an intermediate hop in their shortest path first (SPF) calculations. For example, if the IS-IS routing database is out of memory and cannot accept new LSPs, Dell Networking OS sets the overload bit and IS-IS traffic continues to transit the system. To set or remove the overload bit manually, use the following commands. • Set the overload bit in LSPs.
PAGE 419
To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: • – interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only. View information about IS-IS local update packets. EXEC Privilege mode debug isis local-updates [interface] To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: • – interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only.
PAGE 420
• narrow (supports only type, length, and value [TLV] up to 63) • wide (supports TLV up to 16777215) • transition (supports both narrow and wide and uses a TLV up to 63) • narrow transition (accepts both narrow and wide and sends only narrow or old-style TLV) • wide transition (accepts both narrow and wide and sends only wide or new-style TLV) Configure Metric Values For any level (Level-1, Level-2, or Level-1-2), the value range possible in the isis metric command in INTERFACE mode changes depend
PAGE 421
Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value NOTE: A truncated value is a value that is higher than 63, but set back to 63 because the higher value is not supported. wide narrow transition default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console.
PAGE 422
Table 18. Metric Value when the Metric Style Changes Multiple Times Beginning Metric Style Next Metric Style Resulting Metric Value Next Metric Style Final Metric Value wide transition truncated value wide original value is recovered wide transition transition truncated value wide transition original value is recovered wide transition truncated value narrow default value (10).
PAGE 423
Level-1 Metric Style Level-2 Metric Style Resulting Metric Value wide transition narrow transition truncated value wide transition transition truncated value Sample Configurations The following configurations are examples for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. NOTE: Only one IS-IS process can run on the router, even if both IPv4 and IPv6 routing is being used.
PAGE 424
Figure 45. IPv6 IS-IS Sample Topography IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. Dell(conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ip address 24.3.1.
PAGE 425
router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.00 ! address-family ipv6 unicast multi-topology exit-address-family Dell (conf-router_isis)# Dell (conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown Dell (conf-if-te-3/17)# Dell (conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
PAGE 426
PAGE 427
23 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Link aggregation control protocol (LACP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Introduction to Dynamic LAGs and LACP A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic. The benefits and constraints are basically the same, as described in Port Channel Interfaces in the Interfaces chapter.
PAGE 428
• There is a difference between the shutdown and no interface port-channel commands: – The shutdown command on LAG “xyz” disables the LAG and retains the user commands. However, the system does not allow the channel number “xyz” to be statically created. – The no interface port-channel channel-number command deletes the specified LAG, including a dynamically created LAG. This command removes all LACP-specific commands on the member interfaces.
PAGE 429
• Configure LACP mode. LACP mode [no] port-channel number mode [active | passive | off] – number: cannot statically contain any links. • The default is LACP active. Configure port priority. LACP mode [no] lacp port-priority priority-value The range is from 1 to 65535 (the higher the number, the lower the priority). The default is 32768. LACP Configuration Tasks The following are LACP configuration tasks.
PAGE 430
Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic After creating a LAG, configure the dynamic LAG interfaces. To configure the dynamic LAG interfaces, use the following command. • Configure the dynamic LAG interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode port-channel-protocol lacp Example of the port-channel-protocol lacp Command Dell(conf)#interface Gigabitethernet 3/15 Dell(conf-if-gi-3/15)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-3/15)#port-channel-protocol lacp Dell(conf-if-gi-3/15-lacp)#port-channel 32 mode active ...
PAGE 431
Dell(conf-if-po-32)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-32)#lacp long-timeout Dell(conf-if-po-32)#end Dell# show lacp 32 Port-channel 32 admin up, oper up, mode lacp Actor System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b Partner System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 432
Figure 46. Shared LAG State Tracking To avoid packet loss, redirect traffic through the next lowest-cost link (R3 to R4). Dell Networking OS has the ability to bring LAG 2 down if LAG 1 fails, so that traffic can be redirected. This redirection is what is meant by shared LAG state tracking. To achieve this functionality, you must group LAG 1 and LAG 2 into a single entity, called a failover group. Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking To configure shared LAG state tracking, you configure a failover group.
PAGE 433
port-channel failover-group group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 As shown in the following illustration, LAGs 1 and 2 are members of a failover group. LAG 1 fails and LAG 2 is brought down after the failure. This effect is logged by Message 1, in which a console message declares both LAGs down at the same time. Figure 47.
PAGE 434
• • • • Only a LAG can be a member of a failover group. You can configure shared LAG state tracking on one side of a link or on both sides. If a LAG that is part of a failover group is deleted, the failover group is deleted. If a LAG moves to the Down state due to this feature, its members may still be in the Up state. LACP Basic Configuration Example The screenshots in this section are based on the following example topology.
PAGE 435
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Current address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Interface Index is 109101113 Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 1000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Slave Flowcontrol rx on tx on ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:02:11 Queueing strategy: fifo Input statistics: 132 packets, 163668 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64-byte pkts, 12 over 64-byte pkts, 120 over 1
PAGE 436
Figure 49.
PAGE 437
Figure 50.
PAGE 438
Figure 51.
PAGE 439
interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 no ip address Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21)#int port-channel 10 Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no ip add Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int gig 3/21 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(
PAGE 440
Figure 52.
PAGE 441
Figure 53.
PAGE 442
Figure 54. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
PAGE 443
The Dell Networking OS already contains the functionality to monitor the performance and traffic handling of virtual interfaces created as LAG bundles and ECMP configured on physical user ports. You can now verify the traffic distribution and processing of high-Gigabit Ethernet port channels. Trunk groups for backplane hiGig link bundles between the leaf and spines are created.
PAGE 444
Guidelines for Monitoring High-Gigabit Port Channels Keep the following points in mind when you activate and examine the utilization and working-efficiency of backplane high-Gigabit Ethernet port channels as trunk groups: • By default, the capability to monitor the traffic utilization and distribution of high-Gigabit Ethernet trunk groups is disabled. • Each NPU unit in each line card (or control processor card) can contain multiple trunk groups (highGigabit port channels).
PAGE 445
Enabling the Verification of Member Links Utilization in a High-Gigabit Port Channel This procedure is supported on the Z9000 platform. To examine the working efficiency of the high-Gigabit Ethernet port channel interfaces, perform the following steps: 1. Use the hg-link-bundle-monitor slot slotId npuUnit npuUnitId hg-port-channel portChannelId enable command in Global Configuration mode to enable this functionality to detect the working efficiency of the high-Gigabit port channel bundle interfaces.
PAGE 446
spine NPU units, they range from 1-16. In a Card Type (slot), NPUT units are always indexed starting with the leaf NPU units, and then proceeding to the spine NPU units. In an NPU unit, the port numbering of backplane local ports starts from the end of the last front-end local port ID used. Until Dell Networking OS Release 9.2(0.0), the show commands displayed only the details computed by the buffer statistics tracking counters for the egress queues.
PAGE 447
Layer 2 24 Layer 2 features are supported on the Z9000 platform. Manage the MAC Address Table Dell Networking OS provides the following management activities for the MAC address table. • Clearing the MAC Address Table • Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries • Configuring a Static MAC Address • Displaying the MAC Address Table Clearing the MAC Address Table You may clear the MAC address table of dynamic entries. To clear a MAC address table, use the following command.
PAGE 448
The range is from 10 to 1000000. Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. • Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table.
PAGE 449
interface) before the system verifies that sufficient CAM space exists. If the CAM check fails, a message is displayed: %E90MH:5 %ACL_AGENT-2-ACL_AGENT_LIST_ERROR: Unable to apply access-list MacLimit on GigabitEthernet 5/84 In this case, the configuration is still present in the running-config and show output. Remove the configuration before re-applying a MAC learning limit with a lower value. Also, ensure that you can view the Syslog messages on your session.
PAGE 450
mac learning-limit mac-address-sticky Using sticky MAC addresses allows you to associate a specific port with MAC addresses from trusted devices. If you enable sticky MAC, the specified port retains any dynamically-learned addresses and prevents them from being transferred or learned on other ports. If you configure mac-learning-limit and you enabled sticky MAC, all dynamically-learned addresses are converted to sticky MAC addresses for the selected port.
PAGE 451
no ip address switchport mac learning-limit 1 dynamic no-station-move mac learning-limit station-move-violation log no shutdown Learning Limit Violation Actions Learning limit violation actions are supported only on the Z9000 platform. To configure the system to take an action when the MAC learning limit is reached on an interface and a new address is received using one the following options with the mac learning-limit command, use the following commands.
PAGE 452
Recovering from Learning Limit and Station Move Violations After a learning-limit or station-move violation shuts down an interface, you must manually reset it. To reset the learning limit, use the following commands. NOTE: Alternatively, you can reset the interface by shutting it down using the shutdown command and then re-enabling it using the no shutdown command. • Reset interfaces in the ERR_Disabled state caused by a learning limit violation or station move violation.
PAGE 453
When you use NIC teaming, consider that the server MAC address is originally learned on Port 0/1 of the switch (shown in the following) and Port 0/5 is the failover port. When the NIC fails, the system automatically sends an ARP request for the gateway or host NIC to resolve the ARP and refresh the egress interface. When the ARP is resolved, the same MAC address is learned on the same port where the ARP is resolved (in the previous example, this location is Port 0/5 of the switch).
PAGE 454
Apply all other configurations to each interface in the redundant pair such that their configurations are identical, so that transition to the backup interface in the event of a failure is transparent to rest of the network. Figure 57. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command.
PAGE 455
LACP) port-channel interface as either the primary or backup link in a redundant pair with a physical interface. To ensure that existing network applications see no difference when a primary interface in a redundant pair transitions to the backup interface, be sure to apply identical configurations of other traffic parameters to each interface.
PAGE 456
down: Gi 3/41 00:24:55: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-INACTIVE: Changed Vlan interface state to inactive: Vl 1 00:24:55: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Changed interface state to up: Gi 3/42 00:24:55: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-ACTIVE: Changed Vlan interface state to active: Vl 1 00:24:55: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-STATE_STBY_ACT: Changed interface state from standby to active: Gi 3/42 Dell(conf-if-gi-3/41)#do show ip int brief | find 3/41 GigabitEthernet 3/41 unassigned NO Manual administratively down down GigabitEthernet 3/42 u
PAGE 457
Figure 58. Configuring Far-End Failure Detection The report consists of several packets in SNAP format that are sent to the nearest known MAC address. In the event of a far-end failure, the device stops receiving frames and, after the specified time interval, assumes that the far-end is not available. The connecting line protocol is brought down so that upper layer protocols can detect the neighbor unavailability faster. FEFD State Changes FEFD has two operational modes, Normal and Aggressive.
PAGE 458
4. If the FEFD enabled system is configured to use FEFD in Normal mode and neighboring echoes are not received after three intervals, (you can set each interval can be set between 3 and 300 seconds) the state changes to unknown. 5. If the FEFD system has been set to Aggressive mode and neighboring echoes are not received after three intervals, the state changes to Err-disabled.
PAGE 459
To report interval frequency and mode adjustments, use the following commands. 1. Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3. INTERFACE mode ip address ip address, switchport 2. Activate the necessary ports administratively. INTEFACE mode no shutdown 3. Enable fefd globally. CONFIGURATION mode fefd {interval | mode} Example of the show fefd Command To display information about the state of each interface, use the show fefd command in EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 460
To set up and activate two or more connected interfaces, use the following commands. 1. Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3. INTERFACE mode ip address ip address, switchport 2. Activate the necessary ports administratively. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3.
PAGE 461
Dell#debug fefd packets Dell#2w1d22h : FEFD packet sent via interface Gi 1/0 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info -- Mgmt Mac(00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 1/0) Peer info -- Mgmt Mac (00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 4/0) Sender hold time -- 3 (second) 2w1d22h : FEFD packet received on interface Gi 4/0 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info -- Mgmt Mac(00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 1/0) Peer info -- Mgmt Mac (00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 4/0) Sender hold time -- 3 (second) An RPM Failov
PAGE 462
PAGE 463
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) 25 The link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. 802.1AB (LLDP) Overview LLDP — defined by IEEE 802.1AB — is a protocol that enables a local area network (LAN) device to advertise its configuration and receive configuration information from adjacent LLDP-enabled LAN infrastructure devices.
PAGE 464
Table 21. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Types Type TLV Description 0 End of LLDPDU Marks the end of an LLDPDU. 1 Chassis ID An administratively assigned name that identifies the LLDP agent. 2 Port ID An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received. 3 Time to Live An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received.
PAGE 465
Figure 61. Organizationally Specific TLV IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 22. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
PAGE 466
Type TLV Description 127 Protocol Identity Indicates the protocols that the port can process. Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV. 127 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status Indicates the capability and current setting of the duplex status and bit rate, and whether the current settings are the result of auto-negotiation. This TLV is not available in the Dell Networking OS implementation of LLDP, but is available and mandatory (non-configurable) in the LLDP-MED implementation.
PAGE 467
Regarding connected endpoint devices, LLDP-MED provides network connectivity devices with the ability to: • manage inventory • manage Power over Ethernet (PoE) • identify physical location • identify network policy LLDP-MED is designed for, but not limited to, VoIP endpoints. TIA Organizationally Specific TLVs The Dell Networking system is an LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device (Device Type 4).
PAGE 468
Type SubType TLV Description None or all TLVs must be supported. Dell Networking OS does not currently support these TLVs. 127 5 Inventory — Hardware Revision Indicates the hardware revision of the LLDPMED device. 127 6 Inventory — Firmware Revision Indicates the firmware revision of the LLDPMED device. 127 7 Inventory — Software Revision Indicates the software revision of the LLDPMED device. 127 8 Inventory — Serial Number Indicates the device serial number of the LLDP-MED device.
PAGE 469
Figure 62. LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV Table 24. Dell Networking OS LLDP-MED Capabilities Bit Position TLV Dell Networking OS Support 0 LLDP-MED Capabilities Yes 1 Network Policy Yes 2 Location Identification Yes 3 Extended Power via MDI-PSE Yes 4 Extended Power via MDI-PD No 5 Inventory No 6–15 reserved No Table 25.
PAGE 470
NOTE: As shown in the following table, signaling is a series of control packets that are exchanged between an endpoint device and a network connectivity device to establish and maintain a connection. These signal packets might require a different network policy than the media packets for which a connection is made. In this case, configure the signaling application. Table 26.
PAGE 471
Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP-MED endpoints and network connectivity devices. Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. • Power Type — there are two possible power types: power source entity (PSE) or power device (PD). The Dell Networking system is a PSE, which corresponds to a value of 0, based on the TIA-1057 specification.
PAGE 472
Important Points to Remember • LLDP is enabled by default. • Dell Networking systems support up to eight neighbors per interface. • Dell Networking systems support a maximum of 8000 total neighbors per system. If the number of interfaces multiplied by eight exceeds the maximum, the system does not configure more than 8000. • INTERFACE level configurations override all CONFIGURATION level configurations. • LLDP is not hitless.
PAGE 473
Enabling LLDP LLDP is enabled by default. Enable and disable LLDP globally or per interface. If you enable LLDP globally, all UP interfaces send periodic LLDPDUs. To enable LLDP, use the following command. 1. Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2. Enable LLDP. PROTOCOL LLDP mode no disable Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP, use the following command. • Disable LLDP globally or for an interface.
PAGE 474
3. Enter the disable command. LLDP-MANAGEMENT-INTERFACE mode. To undo an LLDP management port configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no. Advertising TLVs You can configure the system to advertise TLVs out of all interfaces or out of specific interfaces. • If you configure the system globally, all interfaces send LLDPDUs with the specified TLVs. • If you configure an interface, only the interface sends LLDPDUs with the specified TLVs.
PAGE 475
Figure 65. Configuring LLDP Viewing the LLDP Configuration To view the LLDP configuration, use the following command. • Display the LLDP configuration.
PAGE 476
Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Agents To view brief information about adjacent devices or to view all the information that neighbors are advertising, use the following commands. • Display brief information about adjacent devices. • show lldp neighbors Display all of the information that neighbors are advertising.
PAGE 477
Configuring LLDPDU Intervals LLDPDUs are transmitted periodically; the default interval is 30 seconds. To configure LLDPDU intervals, use the following command. • Configure a non-default transmit interval.
PAGE 478
• Return to the default setting.
PAGE 479
advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)#multiplier ? <2-10> Multiplier (default=4) R1(conf-lldp)#multiplier 5 R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description multiplier 5 no disable R1(conf-lldp)#no multiplier R1(conf-lldp)#show
PAGE 480
Figure 66. The debug lldp detail Command — LLDPDU Packet Dissection Relevant Management Objects Dell Networking OS supports all IEEE 802.1AB MIB objects. The following tables list the objects associated with: • received and transmitted TLVs • the LLDP configuration on the local agent • IEEE 802.1AB Organizationally Specific TLVs • received and transmitted LLDP-MED TLVs Table 27.
PAGE 481
MIB Object Category Basic TLV Selection LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description msgTxInterval lldpMessageTxInterval Transmit Interval value. rxInfoTTL lldpRxInfoTTL Time to live for received TLVs. txInfoTTL lldpTxInfoTTL Time to live for transmitted TLVs. mibBasicTLVsTxEnable lldpPortConfigTLVsTxEnabl e Indicates which management TLVs are enabled for system ports.
PAGE 482
Table 28.
PAGE 483
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System interface numbering Local subtype interface number OID LLDP MIB Object lldpLocManAddrIfSu btype Remote lldpRemManAddrIfS ubtype Local lldpLocManAddrIfId Remote lldpRemManAddrIfId Local lldpLocManAddrOID Remote lldpRemManAddrOI D Table 29. LLDP 802.
PAGE 484
Table 30.
PAGE 485
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP-MED MIB Object 3 Location Data Format Local lldpXMedLocLocatio nSubtype Remote lldpXMedRemLocati onSubtype Local lldpXMedLocLocatio nInfo Remote lldpXMedRemLocati onInfo Local lldpXMedLocXPoED eviceType Remote lldpXMedRemXPoED eviceType Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPS EPowerSource Location Identifier Location ID Data 4 Extended Power via MDI Power Device Type Power Source lldpXMedLocXPoEP DPowerSource Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEP SEPowerSource lld
PAGE 486
PAGE 487
Microsoft Network Load Balancing 26 This functionality is supported on the Z9000 platform. Network Load Balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
PAGE 488
• With NLB feature enabled, after learning the NLB ARP entry, all the subsequent traffic is flooded on all ports in VLAN1. With NLB, the data frame is forwarded to all the servers for them to perform load-balancing. NLB Multicast Mode Scenario Consider a sample topology in which four servers, namely S1 through S4, are configured as a cluster or a farm. This set of servers is connected to a Layer 3 switch, which in turn is connected to the end-clients.
PAGE 489
flooded out of all member ports. Since all the servers in the cluster receive traffic, failover and balancing are preserved. Enable and Disable VLAN Flooding • The older ARP entries are overwritten whenever newer NLB entries are learned. • All ARP entries, learned after the feature is enabled, are deleted when the feature is disabled, and RP2 triggers an ARP resolution. The feature is disabled with the no ip vlan-flooding command.
PAGE 490
PAGE 491
Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) 27 Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
PAGE 492
Figure 67. Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) RPs advertise each (S,G) in its domain in type, length, value (TLV) format. The total number of TLVs contained in the SA is indicated in the “Entry Count” field. SA messages are transmitted every 60 seconds, and immediately when a new source is detected. Figure 68.
PAGE 493
Anycast RP Using MSDP, anycast RP provides load sharing and redundancy in PIM-SM networks. Anycast RP allows two or more rendezvous points (RPs) to share the load for source registration and the ability to act as hot backup routers for each other. Anycast RP allows you to configure two or more RPs with the same IP address on Loopback interfaces. The Anycast RP Loopback address are configured with a 32-bit mask, making it a host address.
PAGE 494
• Accept Source-Active Messages that Fail the RFP Check • Specifying Source-Active Messages • Limiting the Source-Active Cache • Preventing MSDP from Caching a Local Source • Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source • Preventing MSDP from Advertising a Local Source • Terminating a Peership • Clearing Peer Statistics • Debugging MSDP • MSDP with Anycast RP • MSDP Sample Configurations Figure 69.
PAGE 495
Figure 70.
PAGE 496
Figure 71.
PAGE 497
Figure 72. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1. Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2. Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains.
PAGE 498
Example of Configuring MSDP Example of Viewing Peer Information R3_E600(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3_E600(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 connect-source Loopback 0 R3_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Description Local Addr State Source SA Up/Down To view details about a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command in EXEC privilege mode. Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache).
PAGE 499
Limiting the Source-Active Cache Set the upper limit of the number of active sources that the Dell Networking OS caches. The default active source limit is 500K messages. When the total number of active sources reaches the specified limit, subsequent active sources are dropped even if they pass the reverse path forwarding (RPF) and policy check. To limit the number of sources that SA cache stores, use the following command. • Limit the number of sources that can be stored in the SA cache.
PAGE 500
Figure 73.
PAGE 501
Figure 74.
PAGE 502
Figure 75.
PAGE 503
Figure 76. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check.
PAGE 504
Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard fifty Dell(conf)#seq 5 permit host 200.0.0.50 Dell#ip msdp sa-cache MSDP Source-Active Cache - 3 entries GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 229.0.50.2 24.0.50.2 200.0.0.50 10.0.50.2 229.0.50.3 24.0.50.3 200.0.0.50 10.0.50.2 229.0.50.4 24.0.50.4 200.0.0.50 10.0.50.2 Dell#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.
PAGE 505
Example of Verifying the System is not Caching Local Sources When you apply this filter, the SA cache is not affected immediately. When sources that are denied by the ACL time out, they are not refreshed. Until they time out, they continue to reside in the cache. To apply the redistribute filter to entries already present in the SA cache, first clear the SA cache. You may optionally store denied sources in the rejected SA cache. R1_E600(conf)#do show run msdp ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
PAGE 506
R3_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R3_E600(conf)# R3_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(639) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Listening Up/Down Time: 00:01:19 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none Preventing MSDP from Advertising a Local Source To prevent MSDP from advertising a local source, use the following command.
PAGE 507
Logging Changes in Peership States To log changes in peership states, use the following command. • Log peership state changes. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp log-adjacency-changes Terminating a Peership MSDP uses TCP as its transport protocol. In a peering relationship, the peer with the lower IP address initiates the TCP session, while the peer with the higher IP address listens on port 639. • Terminate the TCP connection with a peer.
PAGE 508
Example of the clear ip msdp peer Command and Verifying Statistics are Cleared R3_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.3(639) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Established Up/Down Time: 00:04:26 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 5/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none R3_E600(conf)#do clear ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
PAGE 509
technique is less effective as traffic increases because preemptive load balancing requires prior knowledge of traffic distributions. • lack of scalable register decasulation: With only a single RP per group, all joins are sent to that RP regardless of the topological distance between the RP, sources, and receivers, and data is transmitted to the RP until the SPT switch threshold is reached.
PAGE 510
Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1. In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2. Make this address the RP for the group. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim rp-address 3. In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create another Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with a unique IP address.
PAGE 511
CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp originator-id Example of R1 Configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP Example of R2 Configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP Example of R3 Configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP ip multicast-routing ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.3.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/2 ip address 10.11.2.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.
PAGE 512
ip address 10.11.0.23/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.22/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.4.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.22/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 100 ! router bgp 100 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.3 remote-as 200 neighbor 192.168.0.3 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.
PAGE 513
neighbor 192.168.0.22 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.22 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.22 no shutdown ! ip ip ip ip ! ip ip ! ip multicast-msdp msdp peer 192.168.0.11 connect-source Loopback 0 msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 0 msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.22 route 192.168.0.1/32 10.11.0.23 route 192.168.0.22/32 10.11.0.23 pim rp-address 192.168.0.3 group-address 224.0.0.
PAGE 514
interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.21/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.23/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.0.2/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.4.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
PAGE 515
redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.2 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip route 192.168.0.2/32 10.11.0.23 ip multicast-routing ! interface GigabitEthernet 4/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 4/22 ip address 10.10.42.
PAGE 516
PAGE 517
28 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves on per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances.
PAGE 518
Spanning Tree Variations The Dell Networking OS supports four variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 31. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information The following describes the MSTP implementation information.
PAGE 519
• Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes • Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally MSTP is not enabled by default. To enable MSTP globally, use the following commands. When you enable MSTP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the MSTI 0. • Within an MSTI, only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled.
PAGE 520
Specify the keyword vlan then the VLANs that you want to participate in the MSTI. Example of the msti Command Example of Viewing Participating VLANs Example of Viewing Forward and Discard States of Participating Ports Dell(conf)#protocol spanning-tree mstp Dell(conf-mstp)#msti 1 vlan 100 Dell(conf-mstp)#msti 2 vlan 200-300 Dell(conf-mstp)#show config ! protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200-300 All bridges in the MSTP region must have the same VLAN-to-instance mapping.
PAGE 521
BPDU (MRecords): sent 39291, received 7547 The port is not in the Edge port mode Influencing MSTP Root Selection MSTP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the probability that it becomes the root bridge. To change the bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a number as the bridge priority. PROTOCOL MSTP mode msti instance bridge-priority priority A lower number increases the probability that the bridge becomes the root bridge.
PAGE 522
Dell Networking OS equipment that participates in MSTP, ensure these values match on all the equipment. NOTE: Some non-Dell Networking OS equipment may implement a non-null default region name. SFTOS, for example, uses the Bridge ID, while others may use a MAC address. Changing the Region Name or Revision To change the region name or revision, use the following commands. • Change the region name. PROTOCOL MSTP mode • name name Change the region revision number.
PAGE 523
To change the MSTP parameters, use the following commands on the root bridge. 1. Change the forward-delay parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode forward-delay seconds The range is from 4 to 30. The default is 15 seconds. 2. Change the hello-time parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode hello-time seconds NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. 3. Change the max-age parameter.
PAGE 524
Modifying the Interface Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • • Port cost is a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. Port priority influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
PAGE 525
you implement only bpduguard, although the interface is placed in an Error Disabled state when receiving the BPDU, the physical interface remains up and spanning-tree drops packets in the hardware after a BPDU violation. BPDUs are dropped in the software after receiving the BPDU violation. This feature is the same as PortFast mode in spanning tree. CAUTION: Configure EdgePort only on links connecting to an end station. EdgePort can cause loops if you enable it on an interface connected to a network.
PAGE 526
To view the enable status of this feature, use the show running-config spanning-tree mstp command from EXEC Privilege mode. MSTP Sample Configurations The running-configurations support the topology shown in the following illustration. The configurations are from Dell Networking OS systems. Figure 79. MSTP with Three VLANs Mapped to Two Spanning Tree Instances Router 1 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1.
PAGE 527
! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1. Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2. Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3.
PAGE 528
Router 3 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1. Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2. Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3. Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
PAGE 529
(Step 2) interface 1/0/31 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit interface 1/0/32 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit (Step 3) interface vlan 100 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. • Display BPDUs.
PAGE 530
• MSTP flags indicate communication received from the same region. – As shown in the following, the MSTP routers are located in the same region. – Does the debug log indicate that packets are coming from a “Different Region”? If so, one of the key parameters is not matching. • MSTP Region Name and Revision. – The configured name and revisions must be identical among all the routers.
PAGE 531
4w0d4h : MSTP: Received BPDU on Gi 2/21 : ProtId: 0, Ver: 3, Bpdu Type: MSTP, Flags 0x78Different Region (Indicates MSTP routers are in different regions and are not communicating with each other.) CIST Root Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Ext Path Cost: 0 Regional Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, CIST Port Id: 128:470 Msg Age: 0, Max Age: 20, Hello: 2, Fwd Delay: 15, Ver1 Len: 0, Ver Name: Tahiti, Rev: 123, Int Root Path Cost: 0 Rem Hops: 20, Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e8d5.
PAGE 532
PAGE 533
Multicast Features 29 Multicast features are supported on the Z9000 platform. NOTE: Multicast is supported on secondary IP addresses on the platform. NOTE: Multicast routing for IPv6 is not supported. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the following multicast protocols: • PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) • Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) • Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Enabling IP Multicast Enable IP multicast is supported on the Z9000S6000 platform.
PAGE 534
Figure 80. Multicast with ECMP Implementation Information Because protocol control traffic in Dell Networking OS is redirected using the MAC address, and multicast control traffic and multicast data traffic might map to the same MAC address, Dell Networking OS might forward data traffic with certain MAC addresses to the CPU in addition to control traffic. As the upper5 bits of an IP Multicast address are dropped in the translation, 32 different multicast group IDs all map to the same Ethernet address.
PAGE 535
Protocol Ethernet Address PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d • The Dell Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fennertraceroute-ipm. • Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. • Egress L3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic if you enable multicast routing. First Packet Forwarding for Lossless Multicast All initial multicast packets are forwarded to receivers to achieve lossless multicast.
PAGE 536
• If the limit is decreased after it is reached, Dell Networking OS does not clear the existing sessions. Entries are cleared after a timeout (you may also clear entries using clear ip mroute). NOTE: Dell Networking OS waits at least 30 seconds between stopping and starting IGMP join processing. You may experience this delay when manipulating the limit after it is reached.
PAGE 537
no access list limiting Receiver 1, so both IGMP reports are accepted, and two corresponding entries are created in the routing table. Figure 81. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group Table 33. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • Multicast Features Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.
PAGE 538
Location Description • no shutdown 1/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.1/24 no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.
PAGE 539
Location Description • • ip igmp access-group igmpjoinfilR2G2 no shutdown Rate Limiting IGMP Join Requests If you expect a burst of IGMP Joins, protect the IGMP process from overload by limiting that rate at which new groups can be joined. Hosts whose IGMP requests are denied will use the retry mechanism built-in to IGMP so that they’re membership is delayed rather than permanently denied. • Limit the rate at which new groups can be joined.
PAGE 540
Figure 82. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group Table 34. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
PAGE 541
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
PAGE 542
Preventing a PIM Router from Processing a Join To permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list, use the following command. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends not using the ip pim join-filter command on an interface between a source and the RP router. Using this command in this scenario could cause problems with the PIM-SM source registration process resulting in excessive traffic being sent to the CPU of both the RP and PIM DR of the source.
PAGE 543
Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) 30 Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on the Z9000 platform. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
PAGE 544
Areas allow you to further organize your routers within in the AS. One or more areas are required within the AS. Areas are valuable in that they allow sub-networks to "hide" within the AS, thus minimizing the size of the routing tables on all routers. An area within the AS may not see the details of another area’s topology. AS areas are known by their area number or the router’s IP address. Figure 83. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.
PAGE 545
The backbone is the only area with a default area number. All other areas can have their Area ID assigned in the configuration. In the previous example, Routers A, B, C, G, H, and I are the Backbone. • A stub area (SA) does not receive external route information, except for the default route. These areas do receive information from inter-area (IA) routes. NOTE: Configure all routers within an assigned stub area as stubby, and not generate LSAs that do not apply.
PAGE 546
Figure 84. OSPF Routing Examples Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone.
PAGE 547
An ABR can connect to many areas in an AS, and is considered a member of each area it connects to. Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) The autonomous system border area router (ASBR) connects to more than one AS and exchanges information with the routers in other ASs. Generally, the ASBR connects to a non-interior gate protocol (IGP) such as BGP or uses static routes.
PAGE 548
available. An ABR floods the information for the router (for example, the ASBR where the Type 5 advertisement originated. The link-state ID for Type 4 LSAs is the router ID of the described ASBR). • Type 5: LSA — These LSAs contain information imported into OSPF from other routing processes. They are flooded to all areas, except stub areas. The link-state ID of the Type 5 LSA is the external network number.
PAGE 549
Router Priority and Cost Router priority and cost is the method the system uses to “rate” the routers. For example, if not assigned, the system selects the router with the highest priority as the DR. The second highest priority is the BDR. • • Priority is a numbered rating 0 to 255. The higher the number, the higher the priority. Cost is a numbered rating 1 to 65535. The higher the number, the greater the cost. The cost assigned reflects the cost should the router fail.
PAGE 550
Dell Networking OS supports stub areas, totally stub (no summary) and not so stubby areas (NSSAs) and supports the following LSAs, as described earlier. • Router (type 1) • Network (type 2) • Network Summary (type 3) • AS Boundary (type 4) • LSA(type 5) • External LSA (type 7) • Link LSA, OSPFv3 only (type 8) • Opaque Link-Local (type 9) • Grace LSA, OSPFv3 only (type 11) Graceful Restart Graceful restart for OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 are supported on the Z-Series platform in Helper mode only.
PAGE 551
OSPFv2 supports helper-only and restarting-only roles. By default, both helper and restarting roles are enabled. OSPFv2 supports the helper-reject role globally on a router. OSPFv3 supports helper-only and restarting-only roles. The helper-only role is enabled by default. To enable the restarting role in addition to the helper-only role, configure a grace period. Reconfigure OSPFv3 graceful restart to a restarting-only role when you enable the helper-reject role on an interface.
PAGE 552
example, if you create five OSPFv2 processes on a system, there must be at least five interfaces assigned in Layer 3 mode. Each OSPFv2 process is independent. If one process loses adjacency, the other processes continue to function. Processing SNMP and Sending SNMP Traps Though there are may be several OSPFv2 processes, only one process can process simple network management protocol (SNMP) requests and send SNMP traps.
PAGE 553
LSType:Type-5 AS External(5) Age:1 Seq:0x8000000c id:170.1.1.0 Adv:6.1.0.0 Netmask:255.255.255.0 fwd:0.0.0.0 E2, tos:0 metric:0 LSType:Type-5 AS External(5) Age:1 Seq:0x8000000c id:170.1.2.0 Adv:6.1.0.0 Netmask:255.255.255.0 fwd:0.0.0.0 E2, tos:0 metric:0 To confirm that you enabled RFC-2328–compliant OSPF flooding, use the show ip ospf command. Dell#show ip ospf Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 2.2.2.
PAGE 554
Internet Address 20.0.0.1/24, Area 0 Process ID 10, Router ID 1.1.1.2, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 1.1.1.2, Interface address 30.0.0.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 1.1.1.1, Interface address 30.0.0.2 Timer intervals configured, Hello 20, Dead 80, Wait 20, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:04 Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 1.1.1.
PAGE 555
Enabling OSPFv2 To enable Layer 3 routing, assign an IP address to an interface (physical or Loopback). By default, OSPF, similar to all routing protocols, is disabled. You must configure at least one interface for Layer 3 before enabling OSPFv2 globally. If implementing multi-process OSPF, create an equal number of Layer 3 enabled interfaces and OSPF process IDs. For example, if you create four OSPFv2 process IDs, you must have four interfaces with Layer 3 enabled. 1. Assign an IP address to an interface.
PAGE 556
• Disable OSPF. CONFIGURATION mode • no router ospf process-id Reset the OSPFv2 process. EXEC Privilege mode • clear ip ospf process-id View the current OSPFv2 status. EXEC mode show ip ospf process-id Example of Viewing the Current OSPFv2 Status Dell#show ip ospf 55555 Routing Process ospf 55555 with ID 10.10.10.
PAGE 557
3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPFv2 process globally. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf process-id [vrf] The range is from 0 to 65535. After the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF process ID cannot be used again in the system. If you try to enable more OSPF processes than available Layer 3 interfaces, the following message displays: C300(conf)#router ospf 1 % Error: No router ID available.
PAGE 558
In the example below, an IP address is assigned to an interface and an OSPFv2 area is defined that includes the IP address of a Layer 3 interface. The first bold lines assign an IP address to a Layer 3 interface, and theno shutdown command ensures that the interface is UP. The second bold line assigns the IP address of an interface to an area.
PAGE 559
Loopback interfaces also help the OSPF process. OSPF picks the highest interface address as the routerid and a Loopback interface address has a higher precedence than other interface addresses. Dell#show ip ospf 1 int GigabitEthernet 13/23 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.168.0.1/24, Area 0.0.0.1 Process ID 1, Router ID 10.168.253.2, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DROTHER, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.168.253.5, Interface address 10.168.0.
PAGE 560
Example of the show ip ospf database database-summary Command To view which LSAs are transmitted, use the show ip ospf database process-id databasesummary command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip ospf 34 database database-summary OSPF Router with ID (10.1.2.100) (Process ID 34) Area 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.3 Dell# ID Router Network S-Net S-ASBR Type-7 Subtotal 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 To view information on areas, use the show ip ospf process-id command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 561
Example of Viewing Passive Interfaces When you configure a passive interface, the show ip ospf process-id interface command adds the words passive interface to indicate that the hello packets are not transmitted on that interface (shown in bold). Dell#show ip ospf 34 int GigabitEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.2.100/24, Area 1.1.1.1 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.100, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DOWN, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.
PAGE 562
NOTE: A higher convergence level can result in occasional loss of OSPF adjacency. Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements. Only select higher convergence levels following consultation with Dell Technical Support. Example of the fast-converge Command Example of Disabling Fast-Convergence In the examples below, Convergence Level shows the fast-converge parameter setting and Min LSA origination shows the LSA parameters (shown in bold).
PAGE 563
• The dead interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Change the time interval between hello-packet transmission. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf hello-interval seconds – seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 10 seconds). • The hello interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Use the MD5 algorithm to produce a message digest or key, which is sent instead of the key.
PAGE 564
The bold lines in the example show the change on the interface. The change is reflected in the OSPF configuration. Dell(conf-if)#ip ospf cost 45 Dell(conf-if)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 10.1.2.100 255.255.255.0 no shutdown ip ospf cost 45 Dell(conf-if)#end Dell#show ip ospf 34 interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.1.2.100/24, Area 2.2.2.2 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.
PAGE 565
Enabling OSPFv2 Graceful Restart Graceful restart is enabled for the global OSPF process. For more information, refer to Graceful Restart. The Dell Networking implementation of OSPFv2 graceful restart enables you to specify: • grace period — the length of time the graceful restart process can last before OSPF terminates it. • helper-reject neighbors — the router ID of each restart router that does not receive assistance from the configured router.
PAGE 566
3. Configure the graceful restart role or roles that this OSPFv2 router performs. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF- id mode graceful-restart role [helper-only | restart-only] Dell Networking OS supports the following options: • Helper-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only as a helper router. • Restart-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only during unplanned restarts. By default, OSPFv2 supports both restarting and helper roles.
PAGE 567
seq sequence-number {deny |permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le maxprefix-length] The optional parameters are: – ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32). – le max-prefix-length: is the maximum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32). For configuration information about prefix lists, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs). Applying Prefix Lists To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing OSPF routes, use the following commands.
PAGE 568
network 10.1.2.32 0.0.0.255 area 2.2.2.2 network 10.1.3.24 0.0.0.255 area 3.3.3.3 distribute-list dilling in Dell(conf-router_ospf)# Troubleshooting OSPFv2 Dell Networking OS has several tools to make troubleshooting easier. Be sure to check the following, as these questions represent typical issues that interrupt an OSPFv2 process. NOTE: The following is not a comprehensive list, just some examples of typical troubleshooting checks.
PAGE 569
• View debug messages. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip ospf process-id [event | packet | spf | database-timers rate-limit] To view debug messages for a specific OSPF process ID, use the debug ip ospf process-id command. If you do not enter a process ID, the command applies to the first OSPF process. To view debug messages for a specific operation, enter one of the optional keywords: – event: view OSPF event messages. – packet: view OSPF packet information. – spf: view SPF information.
PAGE 570
Figure 86. Basic Topology and CLI Commands for OSPFv2 OSPF Area 0 — Gl 1/1 and 1/2 router ospf 11111 network 10.0.11.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.12.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.1.11.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/2 ip address 10.2.12.2/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 10 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Gl 3/1 and 3/2 router ospf 33333 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.13.0/24 area 0 network 10.
PAGE 571
OSPF Area 0 — Gl 2/1 and 2/2 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.20/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip address 10.2.21.2/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/2 ip address 10.2.22.2/24 no shutdown Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) Open shortest path first version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) is supported on the Z9000 platform.
PAGE 572
Assigning IPv6 Addresses on an Interface To assign IPv6 addresses to an interface, use the following commands. 1. Assign an IPv6 address to the interface. CONF-INT-type slot/port mode ipv6 address ipv6 address IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits; separate each group by a colon (:). The format is A:B:C::F/128. 2. Bring up the interface.
PAGE 573
– number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D. NOTE: Enter the router-id for an OSPFv3 router as an IPv4 IP address. • Disable OSPF. CONFIGURATION mode • no ipv6 router ospf process-id Reset the OSPFv3 process. EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 ospf process Enter an example that illustrates the current task (optional). Enter the tasks the user should do after finishing this task (optional). Configuring Stub Areas To configure IPv6 stub areas, use the following command.
PAGE 574
To indicate that hello packets are not transmitted on that interface, when you configure a passive interface, the show ipv6 ospf interface command adds the words passive interface. Redistributing Routes You can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the OSPFv3 process. With the redistribute command, you can include RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the OSPF process. Route redistribution is also supported between OSPF Routing process IDs.
PAGE 575
period command. The grace period is the time that the OSPFv3 neighbors continue to advertise the restarting router as though it is fully adjacent. When you enable graceful restart (restarting role), an OSPFv3 restarting expects its OSPFv3 neighbors to help when it restarts by not advertising the broken link. When you enable the helper-reject role on an interface using the ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject command, you reconfigure OSPFv3 graceful restart to function in a restarting-only role.
PAGE 576
• Display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa Display the currently configured OSPFv3 parameters for graceful restart (shown in the following example).
PAGE 577
Dell#show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa ! Type-11 Grace LSA (Area 0) LS Age Link State ID Advertising Router LS Seq Number Checksum Length Associated Interface Restart Interval Restart Reason : : : : : : : : : 10 6.16.192.66 100.1.1.1 0x80000001 0x1DF1 36 Gi 5/3 180 Switch to Redundant Processor OSPFv3 Authentication Using IPsec OSPFv3 authentication using IP security (IPsec) is supported only on Z9000 platform. OSPFv3 uses IPsec to provide authentication for OSPFv3 packets.
PAGE 578
between the two mechanisms is the extent of the coverage. ESP only protects IP header fields if they are encapsulated by ESP. You decide the set of IPsec protocols that are employed for authentication and encryption and the ways in which they are employed. When you correctly implement and deploy IPsec, it does not adversely affect users or hosts. AH and ESP are designed to be cryptographic algorithm-independent.
PAGE 579
– Configuring IPsec Authentication on an Interface – Configuring IPsec Encryption on an Interface – Configuring IPsec Authentication for an OSPFv3 Area – Configuring IPsec Encryption for an OSPFv3 Area – Displaying OSPFv3 IPsec Security Policies Configuring IPsec Authentication on an Interface To configure, remove, or display IPsec authentication on an interface, use the following commands.
PAGE 580
NOTE: When you configure encryption using the ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec command, you enable both IPsec encryption and authentication. However, when you enable authentication on an interface using the ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec command, you do not enable encryption at the same time. The SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. Configure the same authentication policy (the same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a link.
PAGE 581
If you have enabled IPSec encryption in an OSPFv3 area using the area encryption command, you cannot use the area authentication command in the area at the same time. The configuration of IPSec authentication on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level configuration. If you remove an interface configuration, an area authentication policy that has been configured is applied to the interface. • Enable IPSec authentication for OSPFv3 packets in an area.
PAGE 582
– area area-id: specifies the area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be encrypted. For area-id, enter a number or an IPv6 prefix. – spi number: is the security policy index (SPI) value. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. – esp encryption-algorithm: specifies the encryption algorithm used with ESP. The valid values are 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL. For AES-CBC, only the AES-128 and AES-192 ciphers are supported. – key: specifies the text string used in the encryption.
PAGE 583
Example of the show crypto ipsec policy Command Example of the show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Command In the first example, the keys are not encrypted (shown in bold). In the second and third examples, the keys are encrypted (shown in bold).
PAGE 584
outbound ah sas spi : 500 (0x1f4) transform : ah-md5-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE inbound esp sas outbound esp sas Interface: TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe40:4d11 IPSecv6 policy name: OSPFv3-1-600 inbound ah sas outbound ah sas inbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des
PAGE 585
• show ipv6 routes Viewing Summary Information To get general route, configuration, links status, and debug information, use the following commands. • View the summary information of the IPv6 routes. EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 route summary View the summary information for the OSPFv3 database. EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 ospf database View the configuration of OSPFv3 neighbors. EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 ospf neighbor View debug messages for all OSPFv3 interfaces.
PAGE 586
PAGE 587
Policy-based Routing (PBR) 31 Policy-based Routing is supported on the Z9000 platform. This chapter covers the following topics: • Overview • Implementing Policy-based Routing with Dell Networking OS • Configuration Task List for Policy-based Routing • Sample Configuration Overview Policy-based Routing (PBR) enables you to make routing decisions based on policies applied to a specific interface.
PAGE 588
To enable a PBR, you create a Redirect List. Redirect lists are defined by rules, or routing policies.
PAGE 589
Implementing Policy-based Routing with Dell Networking OS • Non-contiguous bitmasks for PBR • Hot-Lock PBR Non-contiguous bitmasks for PBR Non-contiguous bitmasks for PBR allows more granular and flexible control over routing policies. Network addresses that are in the middle of a subnet can be included or excluded. Specific bitmasks can be entered using the dotted decimal format. Non-contiguous bitmask example Dell#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list rcl0: Defined as: seq 5 permit ip 200.200.200.
PAGE 590
The following example creates a redirect list by the name of “xyz.” Dell(conf)#ip redirect-list ? WORD Redirect-list name (max 16 chars) Dell(conf)#ip redirect-list xyz Create a Rule for a Redirect-list Use the following command in CONFIGURATION REDIRECT-LIST mode to set the rules for the redirect list. You can enter the command multiple times and create a sequence of redirect rules. Use the seq nn redirect version of the command to organize your rules.
PAGE 591
Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ? <0-255> An IP protocol number icmp Internet Control Message Protocol ip Any Internet Protocol tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip ? A.B.C.D Source address any Any source host host A single source host Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip 222.1.1.1 ? Mask A.B.C.D or /nn Mask in dotted decimal or in format Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip 222.1.1.1 /32 ? A.B.C.
PAGE 592
PBR Exceptions (Permit) Use the command permit to create an exception to a redirect list. Exceptions are used when a forwarding decision should be based on the routing table rather than a routing policy. Dell Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries. Since the order of rules is important, ensure that you configure any necessary sequence numbers.
PAGE 593
Applying a Redirect-list to an Interface Example: Dell(conf-if-te-4/0)#ip redirect-group xyz Dell(conf-if-te-4/0)# Applying a Redirect-list to an Interface Example: Dell(conf-if-te-1/0)#ip redirect-group test Dell(conf-if-te-1/0)#ip redirect-group xyz Dell(conf-if-te-1/0)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/0 no ip address ip redirect-group test ip redirect-group xyz shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/0)# In addition to supporting multiple redirect-lists in a redirect-group, multiple redirect-groups are su
PAGE 594
NOTE: If, the redirect-list is applied to an interface, the output of show ip redirect-list redirect-listname command displays reachability and ARP status for the specified next-hop.
PAGE 595
Create the Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-3/23)#ip redirect-list GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#direct 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)# seq 15 permit ip any any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#show config ! ip redirect-list GOLD description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.
PAGE 596
View Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list GOLD: Defined as: seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any, Next-hop reachable (via Te 3/23), ARP resolved seq 10 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.
PAGE 597
PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) 32 Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is supported on the Z9000 platform. PIM-SM is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop. Implementation Information Be aware of the following PIM-SM implementation information.
PAGE 598
3. If a host on the same subnet as another multicast receiver sends an IGMP report for the same multicast group, the gateway takes no action. If a router between the host and the RP receives a PIM Join message for which it already has a (*,G) entry, the interface on which the message was received is added to the outgoing interface list associated with the (*,G) entry, and the message is not (and does not need to be) forwarded towards the RP.
PAGE 599
Configuring PIM-SM Configuring PIM-SM is a three-step process. 1. Enable multicast routing (refer to the following step). 2. Select a rendezvous point. 3. Enable PIM-SM on an interface. Enable multicast routing. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks.
PAGE 600
NOTE: You can influence the selection of the Rendezvous Point by enabling PIM-Sparse mode on a Loopback interface and assigning a low IP address. To display PIM neighbors for each interface, use the show ip pim neighbor command EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip Neighbor Address 127.87.5.5 127.87.3.5 127.87.50.
PAGE 601
To configure a global expiry time or to configure the expiry time for a particular (S,G) entry, use the following commands. 1. Enable global expiry timer for S, G entries. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds The range is from 211 to 86,400 seconds. The default is 210. 2. Create an extended ACL. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 3. Specify the source and group to which the timer is applied using extended ACLs with permit rules only.
PAGE 602
Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point The rendezvous point (RP) is a PIM-enabled interface on a router that acts as the root a group-specific tree; every group must have an RP. • Identify an RP by the IP address of a PIM-enabled or Loopback interface. ip pim rp-address Example of Viewing an RP on a Loopback Interface Dell#sh run int loop0 ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 1.1.1.1/32 ip pim sparse-mode no shutdown Dell#sh run pim ! ip pim rp-address 1.1.1.1 group-address 224.0.0.
PAGE 603
Configuring a Designated Router Multiple PIM-SM routers might be connected to a single local area network (LAN) segment. One of these routers is elected to act on behalf of directly connected hosts. This router is the designated router (DR). The DR is elected using hello messages. Each PIM router learns about its neighbors by periodically sending a hello message out of each PIM-enabled interface. Hello messages contain the IP address of the interface out of which it is sent and a DR priority value.
PAGE 604
– (option) stale-entry-time: the maximum amount of time that the Dell Networking system preserves entries from a restarting neighbor. The default value is 60 seconds. – (option) helper-only: this mode takes precedence over any graceful restart configuration. NOTE: In helper-only mode, the system preserves the PIM states of a neighboring router while the neighbor gracefully restarts, but the Dell Networking system allows itself to be taken off the forwarding path if it restarts.
PAGE 605
PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) 33 PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is supported on the Z9000 platform. PIM-SSM is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
PAGE 606
Configure PIM-SMM Configuring PIM-SSM is a two-step process. 1. Configure PIM-SMM. 2. Enable PIM-SSM for a range of addresses. Related Configuration Tasks • Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1. Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2. Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created.
PAGE 607
• • • When you remove the mapping configuration, Dell Networking OS removes the corresponding (S,G) states that it created and re-establishes the original (*,G) states. You may enter multiple ssm-map commands for different access lists. You may also enter multiple ssm-map commands for the same access list, as long as they use different source addresses. When an extended ACL is associated with this command, Dell Networking OS displays an error message.
PAGE 608
Interface Vlan 400 Group 239.0.0.1 Uptime 00:00:05 Expires Never Router mode INCLUDE Last reporter 10.11.4.2 Last reporter mode INCLUDE Last report received ALLOW Group source list Source address Uptime Expires 10.11.5.
PAGE 609
34 Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on the Z9000 platform. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
PAGE 610
2 Te 0/0 Te 0/2 both Port N/A N/A Dell (conf-mon-sess-2)#do show running-config monitor session ! monitor session 1 source TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 destination TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 direction both ! monitor session 2 source TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 destination TenGigabitEthernet 0/2 direction both Dell (conf-mon-sess-2)# ! Port Monitoring The Z9000 supports multiple source-destination statements in a monitor session. The maximum number of source ports that can be supported in a session is 128.
PAGE 611
Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#show c ! monitor session 0 source TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 destination TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 direction rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)# Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Source IP Dest IP ------ ------------------- ---- ---------------0 Te 0/0 Te 0/1 rx Port N/A N/A Dell(conf)#monitor session 0 Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#source po 10 dest ten 0/1 dir rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Source IP ------ --
PAGE 612
Figure 87. Port Monitoring Example Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring is supported only on the E-Series platform. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. 1.
PAGE 613
Example of the flow-based enable Command To view an access-list that you applied to an interface, use the show ip accounting access-list command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell(conf)#monitor session 0 Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#flow-based enable Dell(conf)#ip access-list ext testflow Dell(config-ext-nacl)#seq 5 permit icmp any any count bytes monitor Dell(config-ext-nacl)#seq 10 permit ip 102.1.1.
PAGE 614
source session uses a separate reserved VLAN to transmit mirrored packets (mirrored source-session traffic is shown with an orange or green circle with a blue border). The reserved VLANs transport the mirrored traffic in sessions (blue pipes) to the destination analyzers in the local network. Two destination sessions are shown: one for the reserved VLAN that transports orange-circle traffic; one for the reserved VLAN that transports green-circle traffic.
PAGE 615
• Mirrored traffic is transported across the network using 802.1Q-in-802.1Q tunneling. The source address, destination address and original VLAN ID of the mirrored packet are preserved with the tagged VLAN header. Untagged source packets are tagged with the reserve VLAN ID. • The RPM VLAN can’t be a Private VLAN. • The RPM VLAN can be used as GVRP VLAN. • The L3 interface configuration should be blocked for RPM VLAN.
PAGE 616
Restrictions When you configure remote port mirroring, the following restrictions apply: • • • • • • You can configure the same source port to be used in multiple source sessions. You cannot configure a source port channel or source VLAN in a source session if the port channel or VLAN has a member port that is configured as a destination port in a remote-port mirroring session.
PAGE 617
destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches). Configuration Steps for RPM Step Command Purpose 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode. 2 monitor session type rpm The needs to be unique and not already defined in the box specifying type as 'rpm' defines a RPM session.
PAGE 618
Dell(conf)#inte te 0/30 Dell(conf-if-te-0/30)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-0/30)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-0/30)#exit Dell(conf)#interface vlan 30 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#mode remote-port-mirroring Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#tagged te 0/30 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#exit Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#channel-member te 0/28-29 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-po-10)#exit Dell(conf)#monitor session 3 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#source port-channel 10 dest remote-vlan 30 dir both Dell(c
PAGE 619
Dell(conf)#monitor session 1 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#source remote-vlan 10 dest te 0/3 Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#exit Dell(conf)#monitor session 2 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-2)#source remote-vlan 20 destination te 0/4 Dell(conf-mon-sess-2)#tagged destination te 0/4 Dell(conf-mon-sess-2)#exit Dell(conf)#monitor session 3 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#source remote-vlan 30 destination te 0/5 Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#tagged destination te 0/5 Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#end Dell# Dell#show monitor session SessID S
PAGE 620
Configuring the Encapsulated Remote Port Mirroring The ERPM session copies traffic from the source ports/lags or source VLANs and forwards the traffic using routable GRE-encapsulated packets to the destination ip address specified in the session. Important: The steps to be followed for the ERPM Encapsulation : • Dell Networking OS supports ERPM Source session only. The Encapsulated packets terminate at the destination ip or at the analyzer.
PAGE 621
6 flow-based enable Specify flow-based enable for mirroring on a flow by flow basis and also for vlan as source. 7 no enable (Optional) No disable command is mandatory in order for a erpm session to be active. The following example shows a sample configuration . Dell(conf)#monitor session 0 type erpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#source tengigabitethernet 0/9 direction rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#source port-channel 1 direction tx Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#erpm source-ip 1.1.1.1 dest-ip 7.1.1.
PAGE 622
ERPM Behavior on a typical Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS is designed to support only the Encapsulation of the data received / transmitted at the specified source port (Port A). An ERPM destination session / decapsulation of the ERPM packets at the destination Switch are not supported. As seen in the above figure, the packets received/transmitted on Port A will be encapsulated with an IP/GRE header plus a new L2 header and sent to the destination ip address (Port D’s ip address) on the sniffer.
PAGE 623
39th byte in a given ERPM packet. The first 38/42 bytes of the header needs to be ignored/ chopped off. – Some tools support options to edit the capture file. We can make use of such features (for example: editcap ) and chop the ERPM header part and save it to a new trace file. This new file (i.e. the original mirrored packet) can be converted back into stream and fed to any egress interface. b.
PAGE 624
PAGE 625
Private VLANs (PVLAN) 35 The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature is supported on the Z9000 platform. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
PAGE 626
– A primary VLAN has one or more secondary VLANs. – A primary VLAN and each of its secondary VLANs decrement the available number of VLAN IDs in the switch. – A primary VLAN has one or more promiscuous ports. – A primary VLAN might have one or more trunk ports, or none. • Secondary VLAN — a subdomain of the primary VLAN. – There are two types of secondary VLAN — community VLAN and isolated VLAN.
PAGE 627
INTERFACE VLAN mode • [no] private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode • show interfaces private-vlan [interface interface] Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode • show vlan private-vlan [community | interface | isolated | primary | primary_vlan | interface interface] Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
PAGE 628
4. Select the PVLAN mode. INTERFACE mode switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous | trunk} • host (isolated or community VLAN port) • promiscuous (intra-VLAN communication port) • trunk (inter-switch PVLAN hub port) Example of the switchport mode private-vlan Command For interface details, refer to Enabling a Physical Interface in the Interfaces chapter. NOTE: You cannot add interfaces that are configured as PVLAN ports to regular VLANs.
PAGE 629
4. Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan vlan-list The list of secondary VLANs can be: 5. • Specified in comma-delimited (VLAN-ID,VLAN-ID) or hyphenated-range format (VLAN-IDVLAN-ID). • Specified with this command even before they have been created. • Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list. Add promiscuous ports as tagged or untagged interfaces.
PAGE 630
4. Add one or more host ports to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode tagged interface or untagged interface You can enter the interfaces singly or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/ port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add host (isolated) ports to the VLAN. Creating an Isolated VLAN An isolated VLAN is a secondary VLAN of a primary VLAN. An isolated VLAN port can only talk with the promiscuous ports in that primary VLAN. 1.
PAGE 631
Dell(conf-vlan-100)# private-vlan mode isolated Dell(conf-vlan-100)# untagged Gi 2/2 Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 88. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the C300–1: • Gi 0/0 and Gi 23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. • Gi 0/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000.
PAGE 632
• The ports in isolated VLAN 4003 can only communicate with the promiscuous ports in the primary VLAN 4000. • All the ports in the secondary VLANs (both community and isolated VLANs) can only communicate with ports in the other secondary VLANs of that PVLAN over Layer 3, and only when the ip localproxy-arp command is invoked in the primary VLAN.
PAGE 633
• The following examples show the results of using this command without the command options on the C300 and S50V switches in the topology diagram previously shown. Display the primary-secondary VLAN mapping. The following example shows the output from the S50V. show vlan private-vlan mapping This command is specific to the PVLAN feature.
PAGE 634
no ip address switchport switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/4 no ip address switchport switchport mode private-vlan host no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/5 no ip address switchport switchport mode private-vlan host no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/6 no ip address switchport switchport mode private-vlan host no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/25 no ip address switchport switchport mode private-vlan trunk no shutdown ! interface Vlan 40
PAGE 635
Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) 36 Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Protocol Overview PVST+ is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN). For more information about spanning tree, refer to the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) chapter. Figure 89.
PAGE 636
Table 35. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking OS Supports Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ is based on IEEE Standard 802.1w. • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ uses IEEE 802.
PAGE 637
Enabling PVST+ When you enable PVST+, Dell Networking OS instantiates STP on each active VLAN. 1. Enter PVST context. PROTOCOL PVST mode protocol spanning-tree pvst 2. Enable PVST+. PROTOCOL PVST mode no disable Disabling PVST+ To disable PVST+ globally or on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable PVST+ globally. PROTOCOL PVST mode • disable Disable PVST+ on an interface, or remove a PVST+ parameter configuration.
PAGE 638
Figure 90. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a bridge priority.
PAGE 639
Root Identifier has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge Identifier has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 We are the root of VLAN 100 Current root has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Gi 1/32 Port 375 (GigabitEthernet 1/22) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.
PAGE 640
PROTOCOL PVST mode vlan max-age The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. The values for global PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command. Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters (port cost and port priority) to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type.
PAGE 641
The range is from 0 to 240, in increments of 16. The default is 128. The values for interface PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states.
PAGE 642
PVST+ in Multi-Vendor Networks Some non-Dell Networking systems which have hybrid ports participating in PVST+ transmit two kinds of BPDUs: an 802.1D BPDU and an untagged PVST+ BPDU. Dell Networking systems do not expect PVST+ BPDU (tagged or untagged) on an untagged port. If this situation occurs, Dell Networking OS places the port in an Error-Disable state. This behavior might result in the network not converging.
PAGE 643
Example of Viewing the Extend System ID in a PVST+ Configuration Dell(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
PAGE 644
no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 200 bridge-priority 4096 interface GigabitEthernet 3/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/22 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip addr
PAGE 645
Quality of Service (QoS) 37 Quality of service (QoS) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 37.
PAGE 646
Feature Direction Configure a Scheduler to Queue Egress Specify WRED Drop Precedence Egress Create Policy Maps Ingress + Egress Create Input Policy Maps Ingress Honor DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling StrictPriority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress
PAGE 647
Figure 92. Dell Networking QoS Architecture Implementation Information The Dell Networking QoS implementation complies with IEEE 802.1p User Priority Bits for QoS Indication.
PAGE 648
• Configuring Port-Based Rate Policing • Configuring Port-Based Rate Shaping Setting dot1p Priorities for Incoming Traffic Dell Networking OS places traffic marked with a priority in a queue based on the following table. If you set a dot1p priority for a port-channel, all port-channel members are configured with the same value. You cannot assign a dot1p value to an individual interface in a port-channel. Table 38.
PAGE 649
Example of Configuring an Interface to Honor dot1p Priorities on Ingress Traffic Dell#config t Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/0 Dell(conf-if)#service-class dynamic dot1p Dell(conf-if)#end Dell# Priority-Tagged Frames on the Default VLAN Priority-tagged frames on the default VLAN is available on the Z9000 platform. Priority-tagged frames are 802.1Q tagged frames with VLAN ID 0. For VLAN classification, these packets are treated as untagged.
PAGE 650
• Apply rate shaping to a queue. QoS Policy mode Rate-shape Example of rate shape Command Dell#config Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/0 Dell(conf-if)#rate shape 500 50 Dell(conf-if)#end Dell# Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 93.
PAGE 651
Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to each class. For both class maps, Layer 2 and Layer 3, Dell Networking OS matches packets against match criteria in the order that you configure them. Creating a Layer 3 Class Map A Layer 3 class map differentiates ingress packets based on the DSCP value or IP precedence, and characteristics defined in an IP ACL.
PAGE 652
Dell(conf)#interface gig 1/0 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/0)#service-policy input pmap Creating a Layer 2 Class Map All class maps are Layer 3 by default; however, you can create a Layer 2 class map by specifying the layer2 option with the class-map command. A Layer 2 class map differentiates traffic according to 802.1p value and/or VLAN and/or characteristics defined in a MAC ACL.. Use Step 1 or Step 2 to start creating a Layer 2 class map. 1. Create a match-any class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-any 2.
PAGE 653
The order can range from 0 to 254. By default, all ACL rules have an order of 255. Displaying Configured Class Maps and Match Criteria To display all class-maps or a specific class map, use the following command. Dell Networking OS Behavior: An explicit “deny any" rule in a Layer 3 ACL used in a (match any or match all) class-map creates a "default to Queue 0" entry in the CAM, which causes unintended traffic classification. In the following example, traffic is classified in two Queues, 1 and 2.
PAGE 654
Create a QoS Policy There are two types of QoS policies — input and output. Input QoS policies regulate Layer 3 and Layer 2 ingress traffic. The regulation mechanisms for input QoS policies are rate policing and setting priority values. Output QoS policies regulate egress traffic. The regulation mechanisms for output QoS policies are rate limiting, rate shaping, and WRED.
PAGE 655
Creating an Output QoS Policy To create an output QoS policy, use the following commands. 1. Create an output QoS policy. CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-output 2. After you configure an output QoS policy, do one or more of the following: Scheduler Strict — Policy-based Strict-priority Queueing configuration is done through scheduler strict. It is applied to Qos-policy-output. When scheduler strict is applied to multiple Queues, high queue number takes precedence.
PAGE 656
Create Policy Maps There are two types of policy maps: input and output. Creating Input Policy Maps There are two types of input policy-maps: Layer 3 and Layer 2. 1. Create a Layer 3 input policy map. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map-input Create a Layer 2 input policy map by specifying the keyword layer2 with the policy-map-input command. 2.
PAGE 657
Table 40.
PAGE 658
Mapping dot1p Values to Service Queues All traffic is by default mapped to the same queue, Queue 0. If you honor dot1p on ingress, you can create service classes based the queueing strategy in Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets. You may apply this queuing strategy globally by entering the following command from CONFIGURATION mode. • All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable service-class dynamic dot1p on an interface or globally.
PAGE 659
Creating Output Policy Maps Creating output policy maps is supported on the Z9000 platform. 1. Create an output policy map. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map-output 2. After you create an output policy map, do one or more of the following: Applying an Output QoS Policy to a Queue Specifying an Aggregate QoS Policy Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface 3. Apply the policy map to an interface.
PAGE 660
• • • • • • • Start frame delimiter (SFD): 1 byte Destination MAC address: 6 bytes Source MAC address: 6 bytes Ethernet Type/Length: 2 bytes Payload: (variable) Cyclic redundancy check (CRC): 4 bytes Inter-frame gap (IFG): (variable) You can optionally include overhead fields in rate metering calculations by enabling QoS rate adjustment. QoS rate adjustment is disabled by default. • Specify the number of bytes of packet overhead to include in rate limiting, policing, and shaping calculations.
PAGE 661
packets are dropped randomly at an exponential rate until the maximum threshold is reached (as shown in the following illustration); this procedure is the “early detection” part of WRED. If the maximum threshold, for example, 2000KB, is reached, all incoming packets are dropped until the buffer space consumes less than 2000KB of the specified traffic. Figure 94. Packet Drop Rate for WRED You can create a custom WRED profile or use one of the five pre-defined profiles.
PAGE 662
• If you do not configure Dell Networking OS to honor DSCP values on ingress (refer to Honoring DSCP Values on Ingress Packets), all traffic defaults to green drop precedence. • Assign a WRED profile to either yellow or green traffic. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode wred Displaying Default and Configured WRED Profiles To display the default and configured WRED profiles, use the following command. • Display default and configured WRED profiles and their threshold values.
PAGE 663
• Whether or not the policy-map can be applied. • The number of interfaces in a port-pipe to which the policy-map can be applied. Specifically: • Available CAM — the available number of CAM entries in the specified CAM partition for the specified line card or stack-unit port-pipe. • Estimated CAM — the estimated number of CAM entries that the policy will consume when it is applied to an interface.
PAGE 664
experiences a large traffic load. This best-effort network deployment is not suitable for applications that are time-sensitive, such as video on demand (VoD) or voice over IP (VoIP) applications. In such cases, you can use ECN in conjunction with WRED to resolve the dropping of packets under congested conditions. Using ECN, the packets are marked for transmission at a later time after the network recovers from the heavy traffic state to an optimal load.
PAGE 665
• When WRED is configured on the global service-pool (regardless of whether ECN on global servicepool is configured), and one or more queues are enabled with both WRED and ECN, ECN marking takes effect. The packets are ECN marked up to shared- buffer limits as determined by the sharedratio for that global service-pool. WRED/ECN configurations for the queues that belong to backplane ports are common to all the backplane ports and cannot be specified separately for each backplane port granularity.
PAGE 666
ECN for WRED, devices employ this functionality of ECN to mark the packets and reduce the rate of sending packets in a congested, heavily-loaded network. To configure the weight factor for WRED and ECN capabilities, global buffer pools for multiple queues, and associating a service class with ECN marking, perform the following: 1. Configure the weight factor for the computation of average-queue size. This weight value applies to front-end ports.
PAGE 667
7. Create a service class and associate the threshold weight of the shared buffer with each of the queues per port in the egress direction. INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if-te-0/8)#Service-class buffer shared-threshold-weight queue5 4 queue7 6 Classifying Layer 2 Traffic on Layer 3 Interfaces To process Layer 3 packets that contain Dot1p — (IEEE 802.
PAGE 668
All class maps are Layer 3 by default. You can now configure a Layer 3 class map to differentiate traffic according to the IP VLAN value and the DSCP value. You can use the match ip vlan vlan-id command in Class Map Input Configuration mode to specify a match criterion for a class map based on a VLAN ID. You can attach this class map with a policy map, and associate the policy map with a service queue.
PAGE 669
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) 38 Routing information protocol (RIP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. Protocol Overview RIP is the oldest interior gateway protocol. There are two versions of RIP: RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2).
PAGE 670
Implementation Information Dell Networking OS supports both versions of RIP and allows you to configure one version globally and the other version on interfaces or both versions on the interfaces. The following table lists the defaults for RIP in Dell Networking OS. Table 43.
PAGE 671
Enabling RIP Globally By default, RIP is not enabled in Dell Networking OS. To enable RIP globally, use the following commands. 1. Enter ROUTER RIP mode and enable the RIP process on Dell Networking OS. CONFIGURATION mode router rip 2. Assign an IP network address as a RIP network to exchange routing information.
PAGE 672
29.0.0.0/8 31.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 31.0.0.0/8 192.162.2.0/24 [120/1] via 192.162.2.0/24 192.161.1.0/24 [120/1] via 192.161.1.0/24 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 0/0 auto-summary 29.10.10.12, 00:01:21, Fa 0/0 auto-summary 29.10.10.12, 00:00:27, Fa 0/0 auto-summary 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 0/0 auto-summary To disable RIP globally, use the no router rip command in CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 673
• Assign a configured prefix list to all incoming RIP routes. ROUTER RIP mode • distribute-list prefix-list-name in Assign a configured prefix list to all outgoing RIP routes. ROUTER RIP mode distribute-list prefix-list-name out To view the current RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode.
PAGE 674
ROUTER RIP mode • version {1 | 2} Set the RIP versions received on that interface. INTERFACE mode • ip rip receive version [1] [2] Set the RIP versions sent out on that interface.
PAGE 675
The following example of the show ip protocols command confirms that both versions are sent out that interface. This interface no longer sends and receives the same RIP versions as Dell Networking OS does globally (shown in bold).
PAGE 676
The autosummary command requires no other configuration commands. To disable automatic route summarization, enter no autosummary in ROUTER RIP mode. NOTE: If you enable the ip split-horizon command on an interface, the system does not advertise the summarized address. Controlling Route Metrics As a distance-vector protocol, RIP uses hop counts to determine the best route, but sometimes the shortest hop count is a route over the lowest-speed link.
PAGE 677
Enable debugging of RIP. Example of the debug ip rip Command The following example shows the confirmation when you enable the debug function. Dell#debug ip rip RIP protocol debug is ON Dell# To disable RIP, use the no debug ip rip command. RIP Configuration Example The examples in this section show the command sequence to configure RIPv2 on the two routers shown in the following illustration — Core 2 and Core 3. The host prompts used in the following example reflect those names.
PAGE 678
Core 2 RIP Output The examples in the section show the core 2 RIP output. Example of the show ip rip database Command to View Learned RIP Routes on Core 2 Example of the show ip route Command to Show RIP Setup on Core 2 Example of the show ip protocols Command to Show RIP Configuration Activity on Core 2 • • • To display Core 2 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. To display Core 2 RIP setup, use the show ip route command. To display Core 2 RIP activity, use the show ip protocols command.
PAGE 679
Sending updates every 30 seconds, next due in 17 Invalid after 180 seconds, hold down 180, flushed after 240 Output delay 8 milliseconds between packets Automatic network summarization is in effect Outgoing filter for all interfaces is Incoming filter for all interfaces is Default redistribution metric is 1 Default version control: receive version 2, send version 2 Interface Recv Send GigabitEthernet 2/42 2 2 GigabitEthernet 2/41 2 2 GigabitEthernet 2/31 2 2 GigabitEthernet 2/11 2 2 Routing for Networks: 10
PAGE 680
10.11.10.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.2, 00:00:13, GigabitEthernet 3/21 10.200.10.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.2, 00:00:13, GigabitEthernet 3/21 10.300.10.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.2, 00:00:13, GigabitEthernet 3/21 10.11.20.0/24 directly connected,GigabitEthernet 3/21 10.11.30.0/24 directly connected,GigabitEthernet 3/11 10.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 192.168.1.0/24 directly connected,GigabitEthernet 3/43 192.168.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.168.2.0/24 directly connected,GigabitEthernet 3/44 192.168.2.
PAGE 681
Distance: (default is 120) Core3# RIP Configuration Summary Example of Viewing RIP Configuration on Core 2 Example of Viewing RIP Configuration on Core 3 ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip address 10.11.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip address 10.11.20.2/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/41 ip address 10.200.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/42 ip address 10.250.10.1/24 no shutdown router rip version 2 10.200.10.0 10.300.10.0 10.11.10.0 10.11.20.
PAGE 682
PAGE 683
Remote Monitoring (RMON) 39 Remote monitoring (RMON) is supported on the Z9000 platform. RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment.
PAGE 684
• • long as the master RPM had been running long enough to sample all the data. NMS backs up all the long-term data collection and displays the failover downtime from the performance graph. Chassis Down — When a chassis goes down, all sampled data is lost. But the RMON configurations are saved in the configuration file. The sampling process continues after the chassis returns to operation. Platform Adaptation — RMON supports all Dell Networking chassis and all Dell Networking Ethernet interfaces.
PAGE 685
The following example configures RMON alarm number 10. The alarm monitors the MIB variable 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.20.1 (ifEntry.ifOutErrors) once every 20 seconds until the alarm is disabled, and checks the rise or fall of the variable. The alarm is triggered when the 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.20.1 value shows a MIB counter increase of 15 or more (such as from 100000 to 100015). The alarm then triggers event number 1, which is configured with the RMON event command. Possible events include a log entry or an SNMP trap.
PAGE 686
– controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value. – integer: a value from 1 to 65,535 that identifies the RMON Statistics Table. The value must be unique in the RMON Statistic Table. – owner: (Optional) specifies the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics. – ownername: (Optional) records the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics. The default is a null-terminated string.
PAGE 687
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 40 Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Protocol Overview RSTP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanning-tree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). The Dell Networking OS supports three other variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 44.
PAGE 688
Important Points to Remember • RSTP is disabled by default. • Dell Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. • All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology. • Adding a group of ports to a range of VLANs sends multiple messages to the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) task, avoid using the range command.
PAGE 689
3. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Example of Verifying an Interface is in Layer 2 Mode and Enabled To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. The bold lines indicate that the interface is in Layer 2 mode.
PAGE 690
Figure 96. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. Dell#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 691
Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU : sent 121, received 2 The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 379 (GigabitEthernet 2/3) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.379 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 692
Modifying Global Parameters You can modify RSTP parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in the Rapid Spanning Tree group. • Forward-delay — the amount of time an interface waits in the Listening state and the Learning state before it transitions to the Forwarding state. • Hello-time — the time interval in which the bridge sends RSTP BPDUs.
PAGE 693
NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. • The default is 2 seconds. Change the max-age parameter. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 694
To view the current values for interface parameters, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps collectively, use this command. Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively. snmp-server enable traps xstp Influencing RSTP Root Selection RSTP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it is selected as the root bridge.
PAGE 695
• If the interface to be shut down is a port channel, all the member ports are disabled in the hardware. • When you add a physical port to a port channel already in the Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware. • When you remove a physical port from a port channel in the Error Disable state, the error disabled state is cleared on this physical port (the physical port is enabled in the hardware).
PAGE 696
The range is from 50 to 950 milliseconds. Example of Verifying Hello-Time Interval Dell(conf-rstp)#do show spanning-tree rstp brief Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e811.2233 Root Bridge hello time 50 ms, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e811.2233 We are the root Configured hello time 50 ms, max age 20, forward delay 15 NOTE: The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1/256ths of a second.
PAGE 697
Software-Defined Networking (SDN) 41 Dell Networking operating software supports Software-Defined Networking (SDN). For more information, refer to the SDN Deployment Guide.
PAGE 698
PAGE 699
Security 42 Security features are supported on the Z9000 platform. This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide. AAA Accounting Accounting, authentication, and authorization (AAA) accounting is part of the AAA security model.
PAGE 700
– system: sends accounting information of any other AAA configuration. – exec: sends accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode. – command level: sends accounting of commands executed at the specified privilege level. – default | name: enter the name of a list of accounting methods. – start-stop: use for more accounting information, to send a start-accounting notice at the beginning of the requested event and a stop-accounting notice at the end.
PAGE 701
accounting commands 15 com15 accounting exec execAcct Example of Enabling AAA Accounting with a Named Method List Dell(config-line-vty)# accounting commands 15 com15 Dell(config-line-vty)# accounting exec execAcct Monitoring AAA Accounting Dell Networking OS does not support periodic interim accounting because the periodic command can cause heavy congestion when many users are logged in to the network. No specific show command exists for TACACS+ accounting.
PAGE 702
Configuration Task List for AAA Authentication The following sections provide the configuration tasks. • Configure Login Authentication for Terminal Lines • Configuring AAA Authentication Login Methods • Enabling AAA Authentication For a complete list of all commands related to login authentication, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide. Configure Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can assign up to five authentication methods to a method list.
PAGE 703
To view the configuration, use the show config command in LINE mode or the show runningconfig in EXEC Privilege mode. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends using the none method only as a backup. This method does not authenticate users. The none and enable methods do not work with secure shell (SSH). You can create multiple method lists and assign them to different terminal lines. Enabling AAA Authentication To enable AAA authentication, use the following command. • Enable AAA authentication.
PAGE 704
To use local authentication for enable secret on the console, while using remote authentication on VTY lines, issue the following commands. Dell(config)# aaa authentication enable mymethodlist radius tacacs Dell(config)# line vty 0 9 Dell(config-line-vty)# enable authentication mymethodlist Server-Side Configuration • TACACS+ — When using TACACS+, Dell Networking sends an initial packet with service type SVC_ENABLE, and then sends a second packet with just the password.
PAGE 705
spanning-tree command, log in to the router, enter the enable command for privilege level 15 (this privilege level is the default level for the command) and then enter CONFIGURATION mode. You can configure passwords to control access to the box and assign different privilege levels to users. Dell Networking OS supports the use of passwords when you log in to the system and when you enter the enable command.
PAGE 706
• Configure a password for a privilege level. CONFIGURATION mode enable password [level level] [encryption-mode] password Configure the optional and required parameters: – level level: Specify a level from 0 to 15. Level 15 includes all levels. – encryption-type: Enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. – password: Enter a string. To change only the password for the enable command, configure only the password parameter.
PAGE 707
To assign commands and passwords to a custom privilege level, use the following commands. You must be in privilege level 15. 1. Assign a user name and password. CONFIGURATION mode username name [access-class access-list-name] [privilege level] [nopassword | password [encryption-type] password] Configure the optional and required parameters: • • • • • • 2. name: enter a text string (up to 63 characters). access-class access-list-name: enter the name of a configured IP ACL.
PAGE 708
Line 2: All other users are assigned a password to access privilege level 8. Line 3: The configure command is assigned to privilege level 8 because it needs to reach CONFIGURATION mode where the snmp-server commands are located. Line 4: The snmp-server commands, in CONFIGURATION mode, are assigned to privilege level 8.
PAGE 709
To specify a password for the terminal line, use the following commands. • Configure a custom privilege level for the terminal lines. LINE mode privilege level level • – level level: The range is from 0 to 15. Levels 0, 1, and 15 are pre-configured. Levels 2 to 14 are available for custom configuration. Specify either a plain text or encrypted password.
PAGE 710
6. Enter the following commands at the Grub command line prompt (grub>). set stconfigignore=true save_env stconfigignore reboot 7. The Z9000 system boots up with factory default configuration. The default Dell> system prompt displays when the system boots. 8. Copy the startup-config into the running-config. 9. To display the content of the startup-config, remove the previous authentication configuration and set the new authentication parameters. The rest of the previous configuration is preserved.
PAGE 711
If an error occurs in the transmission or reception of RADIUS packets, you can view the error by enabling the debug radius command. Transactions between the RADIUS server and the client are encrypted (the users’ passwords are not sent in plain text). RADIUS uses UDP as the transport protocol between the RADIUS server host and the client. For more information about RADIUS, refer to RFC 2865, Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service.
PAGE 712
• Set a privilege level. privilege level Configuration Task List for RADIUS To authenticate users using RADIUS, you must specify at least one RADIUS server so that the system can communicate with and configure RADIUS as one of your authentication methods. The following list includes the configuration tasks for RADIUS.
PAGE 713
CONFIGURATION mode • line {aux 0 | console 0 | vty number [end-number]} Enable AAA login authentication for the specified RADIUS method list. LINE mode login authentication {method-list-name | default} • This procedure is mandatory if you are not using default lists. To use the method list.
PAGE 714
To delete a RADIUS server host, use the no radius-server host {hostname | ip-address} command. Setting Global Communication Parameters for all RADIUS Server Hosts You can configure global communication parameters (auth-port, key, retransmit, and timeout parameters) and specific host communication parameters on the same system. However, if you configure both global and specific host parameters, the specific host parameters override the global parameters for that RADIUS server host.
PAGE 715
TACACS+ Dell Networking OS supports terminal access controller access control system (TACACS+ client, including support for login authentication. Configuration Task List for TACACS+ The following list includes the configuration task for TACACS+ functions.
PAGE 716
Example of a Failed Authentication To view the configuration, use the show config in LINE mode or the show running-config tacacs + command in EXEC Privilege mode. If authentication fails using the primary method, Dell Networking OS employs the second method (or third method, if necessary) automatically. For example, if the TACACS+ server is reachable, but the server key is invalid, Dell Networking OS proceeds to the next authentication method.
PAGE 717
Example of Specifying a TACACS+ Server Host Dell(conf)# Dell(conf)#aaa authentication login tacacsmethod tacacs+ Dell(conf)#aaa authentication exec tacacsauthorization tacacs+ Dell(conf)#tacacs-server host 25.1.1.2 key Force Dell(conf)# Dell(conf)#line vty 0 9 Dell(config-line-vty)#login authentication tacacsmethod Dell(config-line-vty)#end Specifying a TACACS+ Server Host To specify a TACACS+ server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command.
PAGE 718
Command Authorization The AAA command authorization feature configures Dell Networking OS to send each configuration command to a TACACS server for authorization before it is added to the running configuration. By default, the AAA authorization commands configure the system to check both EXEC mode and CONFIGURATION mode commands. Use the no aaa authorization config-commands command to enable only EXEC mode command checking.
PAGE 719
• Display SSH connection information. EXEC Privilege mode show ip ssh Specifying an SSH Version The following example uses the ip ssh server version 2 command to enable SSH version 2 and the show ip ssh command to confirm the setting. Dell(conf)#ip ssh server version 2 Dell(conf)#do show ip ssh SSH server : disabled. SSH server version : v2. Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication : disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled.
PAGE 720
• ip ssh key-size: configure the size of the server-generated RSA SSHv1 key. • ip ssh password-authentication enable: enable password authentication for the SSH server. • ip ssh pub-key-file: specify the file the host-based authentication uses. • ip ssh rhostsfile: specify the rhost file the host-based authorization uses. • ip ssh rsa-authentication enable: enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server. • ip ssh rsa-authentication: add keys for the RSA authentication.
PAGE 721
Dell(conf)#ip ssh server enable % Please wait while SSH Daemon initializes ... done. Dell(conf)#ip ssh password-authentication enable Dell#sh ip ssh SSH server : enabled. Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication : disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled. Using RSA Authentication of SSH The following procedure authenticates an SSH client based on an RSA key using RSA authentication. This method uses SSH version 2. 1.
PAGE 722
4. Copy the file shosts and rhosts to the Dell Networking system. 5. Disable password authentication and RSA authentication, if configured CONFIGURATION mode or EXEC Privilege mode no ip ssh password-authentication or no ip ssh rsa-authentication 6. Enable host-based authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh hostbased-authentication enable 7. Bind shosts and rhosts to host-based authentication.
PAGE 723
Example of Client-Based SSH Authentication Dell#ssh 10.16.127.201 ? -l User name option -p SSH server port option (default 22) -v SSH protocol version Troubleshooting SSH To troubleshoot SSH, use the following information. You may not bind id_rsa.pub to RSA authentication while logged in via the console. In this case, this message displays:%Error: No username set for this term. Enable host-based authentication on the server (Dell Networking system) and the client (Unix machine).
PAGE 724
• • VTY Line Local Authentication and Authorization VTY Line Remote Authentication and Authorization VTY Line Local Authentication and Authorization Dell Networking OS retrieves the access class from the local database. To use this feature: 1. Create a username. 2. Enter a password. 3. Assign an access class. 4. Enter a privilege level. You can assign line authentication on a per-VTY basis; it is a simple password authentication, using an access-class as authorization.
PAGE 725
Example of Configuring VTY Authorization Based on Access Class Retrieved from the Line (Per Network Address) Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard deny10 Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#permit 10.0.0.0/8 Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#deny any Dell(conf)# Dell(conf)#aaa authentication login tacacsmethod tacacs+ Dell(conf)#tacacs-server host 256.1.1.
PAGE 726
PAGE 727
Service Provider Bridging 43 Service provider bridging is supported on the Z9000 platform. VLAN Stacking Virtual local area network (VLAN) stacking is supported on the Z9000 platform. VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.1Q — Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks. It enables service providers to use 802.
PAGE 728
Figure 97. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLANStack-enabled VLAN. • Dell Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
PAGE 729
Configure VLAN Stacking Configuring VLAN-Stacking is a three-step process. 1. Creating Access and Trunk Ports 2. Assign access and trunk ports to a VLAN (Creating Access and Trunk Ports). 3. Enabling VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN.
PAGE 730
interface GigabitEthernet 7/12 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk no shutdown Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN To enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN, use the following command. • Enable VLAN-Stacking for the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible Example of Viewing VLAN Stack Member Status To display the status and members of a VLAN, use the show vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. Members of a VLAN-Stacking-enabled VLAN are marked with an M in column Q.
PAGE 731
To configure trunk ports, use the following commands. 1. Configure a trunk port to carry untagged, single-tagged, and double-tagged traffic by making it a hybrid port. INTERFACE mode portmode hybrid 2. Add the port to a 802.1Q VLAN as tagged or untagged.
PAGE 732
• MT — stacked trunk • MU — stacked access port • T — 802.1Q trunk port • U — 802.1Q access port • NU — Native VLAN (untagged) Dell# debug member vlan 603 vlan id : 603 ports : Gi 2/47 (MT), Gi 3/1(MU), Gi 3/25(MT), Gi 3/26(MT), Gi 3/27(MU) Dell#debug member port gigabitethernet 2/47 vlan id : 603 (MT), 100(T), 101(NU) Dell# VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks The first field in the VLAN tag is the tag protocol identifier (TPID), which is 2 bytes.
PAGE 733
Figure 98.
PAGE 734
Figure 99.
PAGE 735
Figure 100. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence VLAN stacking packet drop precedence is available on the Z9000 platform. The drop eligible indicator (DEI) bit in the S-Tag indicates to a service provider bridge which packets it should prefer to drop when congested. Enabling Drop Eligibility Enable drop eligibility globally before you can honor or mark the DEI value. When you enable drop eligibility, DEI mapping or marking takes place according to the defaults.
PAGE 736
Table 47. Drop Eligibility Behavior Ingress Egress DEI Disabled DEI Enabled Normal Port Normal Port Retain CFI Set CFI to 0. Trunk Port Trunk Port Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI. Retain outer tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0. Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0 Set outer tag CFI to 0 Access Port Trunk Port To enable drop eligibility globally, use the following command. • Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.
PAGE 737
Marking Egress Packets with a DEI Value On egress, you can set the DEI value according to a different mapping than ingress. For ingress information, refer to Honoring the Incoming DEI Value. To mark egress packets, use the following command. • Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet.
PAGE 738
• • Mark the S-Tag dot1p and queue the frame according to the original C-Tag dot1p. In this case, you must have other dot1p QoS configurations; this option is classic dot1p marking. Mark the S-Tag dot1p and queue the frame according to the S-Tag dot1p. For example, if frames with C-Tag dot1p values 0, 6, and 7 are mapped to an S-Tag dot1p value 0, all such frames are sent to the queue associated with the S-Tag 802.1p value 0.
PAGE 739
service-policy input in layer2 no shutdown Mapping C-Tag to S-Tag dot1p Values To map C-Tag dot1p values to S-Tag dot1p values and mark the frames accordingly, use the following commands. 1. Allocate CAM space to enable queuing frames according to the C-Tag or the S-Tag.
PAGE 740
Figure 102. VLAN Stacking without L2PT You might need to transport control traffic transparently through the intermediate network to the other region. Layer 2 protocol tunneling enables BPDUs to traverse the intermediate network by identifying frames with the Bridge Group Address, rewriting the destination MAC to a user-configured non-reserved address, and forwarding the frames.
PAGE 741
the intermediate network because only Dell Networking OS could recognize the significance of the destination MAC address and rewrite it to the original Bridge Group Address. In Dell Networking OS version 8.2.1.0 and later, the L2PT MAC address is user-configurable, so you can specify an address that non-Dell Networking systems can recognize and rewrite the address at egress edge. Figure 103. VLAN Stacking with L2PT Implementation Information • L2PT is available for STP, RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ BPDUs.
PAGE 742
Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1. Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-profile 2. Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3. Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN.
PAGE 743
4. Set a maximum rate at which the RPM processes BPDUs for L2PT. VLAN STACKING mode protocol-tunnel rate-limit The default is: no rate limiting. The range is from 64 to 320 kbps. Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To debug Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. • Display debugging information for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode debug protocol-tunnel Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.
PAGE 744
PAGE 745
sFlow 44 Configuring sFlow is supported on the Z9000 platform. Overview The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports sFlow version 5. sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers. sFlow uses two types of sampling: • Statistical packet-based sampling of switched or routed packet flows.
PAGE 746
Important Points to Remember • The Dell Networking OS implementation of the sFlow MIB supports sFlow configuration via snmpset. • Dell Networking recommends the sFlow Collector be connected to the Dell Networking chassis through a line card port rather than the route processor module (RPM) management Ethernet port. • Dell Networking OS exports all sFlow packets to the collector. A small sampling rate can equate to many exported packets.
PAGE 747
77 UDP packets exported 0 UDP packets dropped 165 sFlow samples collected 69 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling Linecard 1 Port set 0 H/W sampling rate 8192 Gi 1/16: configured rate 8192, actual rate 8192, sub-sampling rate 1 Gi 1/17: configured rate 16384, actual rate 16384, sub-sampling rate 2 Linecard 3 Port set 1 H/W sampling rate 16384 Gi 3/40: configured rate 16384, actual rate 16384, sub-sampling rate 1 If you did not enable any extended information, the show output displays the following (sho
PAGE 748
The second bold lines indicate sFlow is enabled on linecards Gi 1/16 and Gi 1/17 Dell#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.
PAGE 749
Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Line Card) Dell#show sflow stack-unit 1 stack-unit 1 Samples rcvd from h/w :165 Samples dropped for sub-sampling :69 Total UDP packets exported :77 UDP packets exported via RPM :77 UDP packets dropped : Configuring Specify Collectors The sflow collector command allows identification of sFlow collectors to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. You can specify up to two sFlow collectors. If you specify two collectors, the samples are sent to both.
PAGE 750
As a result of back-off, the actual sampling-rate of an interface may differ from its configured sampling rate. You can view the actual sampling-rate of the interface and the configured sample-rate by using the show sflow command. sFlow on LAG ports When a physical port becomes a member of a LAG, it inherits the sFlow configuration from the LAG port. Enabling Extended sFlow The S-Series platforms support extended-switch information processing only.
PAGE 751
Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global extended information enabled: none 0 collectors configured 0 UDP packets exported 0 UDP packets dropped 0 sFlow samples collected 0 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling Important Points to Remember • To export extended-gateway data, BGP must learn the IP destination address. • If the IP destination address is not learned via BGP the Dell Networking system does not export extended-gateway data.
PAGE 752
IP SA IP DA srcAS and srcPeerAS dstAS and dstPeerAS Description addresses are learned by different routing protocols, and for cases where is source is reachable over ECMP. BGP 752 BGP Exported Exported Extended gateway data is packed.
PAGE 753
45 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Simple network management protocol (SNMP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. NOTE: On Dell Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd). Protocol Overview Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements.
PAGE 754
Configuration mode. When the FIPS mode is enabled on the system, SNMPv3 operates in a FIPScompliant manner, and only the FIPS-approved algorithm options are available for SNMPv3 user configuration. When the FIPS mode is disabled on the system, all options are available for SNMPv3 user configuration.
PAGE 755
Configuration Task List for SNMP Configuring SNMP version 1 or version 2 requires a single step. NOTE: The configurations in this chapter use a UNIX environment with net-snmp version 5.4. This environment is only one of many RFC-compliant SNMP utilities you can use to manage your Dell Networking system using SNMP. Also, these configurations use SNMP version 2c. • Creating a Community Configuring SNMP version 3 requires configuring SNMP users in one of three methods.
PAGE 756
Creating a Community For SNMPv1 and SNMPv2, create a community to enable the community-based security in Dell Networking OS. The management station generates requests to either retrieve or alter the value of a management object and is called the SNMP manager. A network element that processes SNMP requests is called an SNMP agent. An SNMP community is a group of SNMP agents and managers that are allowed to interact.
PAGE 757
CONFIGURATION mode • snmp-server group group-name 3 noauth auth read name write name Configure an SNMPv3 view. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} NOTE: To give a user read and write view privileges, repeat this step for each privilege type. • Configure the user with an authorization password (password privileges only). CONFIGURATION mode • snmp-server user name group-name 3 noauth auth md5 auth-password Configure an SNMP group (password privileges only).
PAGE 758
There are several UNIX SNMP commands that read data. • Read the value of a single managed object. • snmpget -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.instance} Read the value of the managed object directly below the specified object. • snmpgetnext -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.instance} Read the value of many objects at once. snmpwalk -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.
PAGE 759
Configuring Contact and Location Information using SNMP You may configure system contact and location information from the Dell Networking system or from the management station using SNMP. To configure system contact and location information from the Dell Networking system and from the management station using SNMP, use the following commands. • (From a Dell Networking system) Identify the system manager along with this person’s contact information (for example, an email address or phone number).
PAGE 760
Subscribing to Managed Object Value Updates using SNMP By default, the Dell Networking system displays some unsolicited SNMP messages (traps) upon certain events and conditions. You can also configure the system to send the traps to a management station. Traps cannot be saved on the system. Dell Networking OS supports the following three sets of traps: • • • RFC 1157-defined traps — coldStart, warmStart, linkDown, linkUp, authenticationFailure, and egpNeighbborLoss.
PAGE 761
snmp coldstart snmp linkdown snmp linkup SNMP_COLD_START: Agent Initialized - SNMP COLD_START. SNMP_WARM_START:Agent Initialized - SNMP WARM_START. PORT_LINKDN:changed interface state to down:%d PORT_LINKUP:changed interface state to up:%d Enabling a Subset of SNMP Traps You can enable a subset of Dell Networking enterprise-specific SNMP traps using one of the following listed command options. To enable a subset of Dell Networking enterprise-specific SNMP traps, use the following command.
PAGE 762
envmon fan FAN_TRAY_BAD: Major alarm: fantray %d is missing or down FAN_TRAY_OK: Major alarm cleared: fan tray %d present FAN_BAD: Minor alarm: some fans in fan tray %d are down FAN_OK: Minor alarm cleared: all fans in fan tray %d are good vlt Enable VLT traps. vrrp Enable VRRP state change traps xstp %SPANMGR-5-STP_NEW_ROOT: New Spanning Tree Root, Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.fc35.
PAGE 763
Copy Configuration Files Using SNMP To do the following, use SNMP from a remote client. • copy the running-config file to the startup-config file • copy configuration files from the Dell Networking system to a server • copy configuration files from a server to the Dell Networking system You can perform all of these tasks using IPv4 or IPv6 addresses. The examples in this section use IPv4 addresses; however, you can substitute IPv6 addresses for the IPv4 addresses in all of the examples.
PAGE 764
MIB Object OID Object Values Description copyDestFileType . 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1. 1.5 1 = Dell Networking OS file Specifies the type of file to copy to. 2 = running-config • 3 = startup-config • copyDestFileLocation . 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1. 1.6 1 = flash If copySourceFileType is running-config or startup-config, the default copyDestFileLocatio n is flash. If copyDestFileType is a binary, you must specify copyDestFileLocatio n and copyDestFileName.
PAGE 765
Copying a Configuration File To copy a configuration file, use the following commands. NOTE: In UNIX, enter the snmpset command for help using the following commands. Place the f10-copy-config.mib file in the directory from which you are executing the snmpset command or in the snmpset tool path. 1. Create an SNMP community string with read/write privileges. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community community-name rw 2. Copy the f10-copy-config.
PAGE 766
• Copy the running-config to the startup-config from the UNIX machine. snmpset -v 2c -c public force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 2 copyDestFileType.index i 3 Example of Copying Configuration Files (Using MIB Object Names) Example of Copying Configuration Files (Using OIDs) The following examples show the command syntax using MIB object names and the same command using the object OIDs. In both cases, a unique index number follows the object. > snmpset -v 2c -r 0 -t 60 -c private -m .
PAGE 767
Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Server via FTP To copy the startup-config to the server via FTP from the UNIX machine, use the following command. Copy the startup-config to the server via FTP from the UNIX machine. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 2 copyDestFileName.index s filepath/filename copyDestFileLocation.index i 4 copyServerAddress.index a server-ip-address copyUserName.index s server-login-id copyUserPassword.
PAGE 768
s filepath/filename copyDestFileType.index i 3 copyServerAddress.index a server-ip-address copyUserName.index s server-login-id copyUserPassword.index s server-login-password Example of Copying a Binary File From the Server to the Startup-Configuration via FTP > snmpset -v 2c -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 copySrcFileType. 10 i 1 copySrcFileLocation.10 i 4 copyDestFileType.10 i 3 copySrcFileName.10 s /home/ myfilename copyServerAddress.10 a 172.16.1.56 copyUserName.
PAGE 769
Obtaining a Value for MIB Objects To obtain a value for any of the MIB objects, use the following command. • Get a copy-config MIB object value. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address [OID.index | mib-object.index] index: the index value used in the snmpset command used to complete the copy operation. NOTE: You can use the entire OID rather than the object name. Use the form: OID.index.
PAGE 770
Assigning a VLAN Alias Write a character string to the dot1qVlanStaticName object to assign a name to a VLAN. Example of Assigning a VLAN Alias using SNMP [Unix system output] > snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.185 . 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.1.1107787786 s "My VLAN" SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.1.
PAGE 771
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.4.1107787786 = Hex-STRING: 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 In the following example, Port 0/2 is added as a tagged member of VLAN 10. >snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.185 . 1.3.6.1.2.1.
PAGE 772
To set time to wait till bgp session are up set 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.3 and 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.6 Enabling and Disabling a Port using SNMP To enable and disable a port using SNMP, use the following commands. 1. Create an SNMP community on the Dell system. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community 2. From the Dell Networking system, identify the interface index of the port for which you want to change the admin status.
PAGE 773
Table 51. MIB Objects for Fetching Dynamic MAC Entries in the Forwarding Database MIB Object OID MIB Description dot1dTpFdbTable .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3 Q-BRIDGE MIB List the learned unicast MAC addresses on the default VLAN. dot1qTpFdbTable .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2. 2 Q-BRIDGE MIB List the learned unicast MAC addresses on nondefault VLANs. dot3aCurAggFdb Table .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2. 1.1.5 F10-LINKAGGREGATION -MIB List the learned MAC addresses of aggregated links (LAG).
PAGE 774
Use dot3aCurAggFdbTable to fetch the learned MAC address of a port-channel. The instance number is the decimal conversion of the MAC address concatenated with the port-channel number. --------------MAC Addresses on Force10 System------------------R1_E600(conf)#do show mac-address-table VlanId Mac Address Type Interface State 1000 00:01:e8:06:95:ac Dynamic Po 1 Active -------------Query from Management Station--------------------->snmpwalk -v 2c -c techpubs 10.11.131.162 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2.1.1.
PAGE 775
Table 52. MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions MIB Object OID Description MIB chSysSwInPartitionAImg 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2. Vers 8.1.11 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition A. Chassis MIB chSysSwInPartitionBImg 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2. Vers 8.1.12 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition B.
PAGE 776
If we learn MAC addresses for the LAG, status is shown for those as well. dot3aCurAggVlanId SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.1.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.1 dot3aCurAggMacAddr SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.2.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.1 00 00 00 01 dot3aCurAggIndex SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.3.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.1 dot3aCurAggStatus SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.4.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.
PAGE 777
Storm Control 46 Storm control is supported on the Z9000 platform. The storm control feature allows you to control unknown-unicast and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell Networking OS supports broadcast control (the storm-control broadcast command) for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. Configure Storm Control Storm control is supported in INTERFACE mode and CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 778
PAGE 779
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 47 The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Protocol Overview STP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1d — that eliminates loops in a bridged topology by enabling only a single path through the network. By eliminating loops, the protocol improves scalability in a large network and allows you to implement redundant paths, which can be activated after the failure of active paths.
PAGE 780
Important Points to Remember • • • • • STP is disabled by default. The Dell Networking OS supports only one spanning tree instance (0). For multiple instances, enable the multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) or per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). You may only enable one flavor of spanning tree at any one time. All ports in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the spanning tree topology at the time you enable the protocol.
PAGE 781
To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1. If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Example of the show config Command To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode.
PAGE 782
Figure 105. Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To enable STP globally, use the following commands. 1. Enter PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol spanning-tree 0 2. Enable STP. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode no disable Example of Verifying Spanning Tree is Enabled Example of Viewing Spanning Tree Configuration Example of Verifying a Port Participates in Spanning Tree To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
PAGE 783
To view the spanning tree configuration and the interfaces that are participating in STP, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. R2#show spanning-tree 0 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, address 0001.e826.ddb7 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Current root has priority 32768, address 0001.e80d.
PAGE 784
INTERFACE mode spanning-tree 0 Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hellotime, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends that only experienced network administrators change the spanning tree parameters. Poorly planned modification of the spanning tree parameters can negatively affect network performance.
PAGE 785
• Change the max-age parameter (the refresh interval for configuration information that is generated by recomputing the spanning tree topology). PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. Refer to the second example in Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally.
PAGE 786
the BPDU, the physical interface remains up and spanning-tree drops packets in the hardware after a BPDU violation. BPDUs are dropped in the software after receiving the BPDU violation. CAUTION: Enable PortFast only on links connecting to an end station. PortFast can cause loops if it is enabled on an interface connected to a network. To enable PortFast on an interface, use the following command. • Enable PortFast on an interface.
PAGE 787
• • • • • If the interface to be shut down is a port channel, all the member ports are disabled in the hardware. When you add a physical port to a port channel already in the Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware. When you remove a physical port from a port channel in the Error Disable state, the Error Disabled state is cleared on this physical port (the physical port is enabled in the hardware).
PAGE 788
• disables spanning tree on an interface • drops all BPDUs at the line card without generating a console message Example of Blocked BPDUs Dell(conf-if-gi-0/7)#do show spanning-tree rstp brief Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e805.fb07 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e85d.0e90 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Interface Name PortID Prio ---------- -------Gi 0/6 128.
PAGE 789
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Dell# STP Root Guard STP root guard is supported on the platform. Use the STP root guard feature in a Layer 2 network to avoid bridging loops. In STP, the switch in the network with the lowest priority (as determined by STP or set with the bridge-priority command) is selected as the root bridge. If two switches have the same priority, the switch with the lower MAC address is selected as the root.
PAGE 790
Figure 107. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis. Dell Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with STP root guard: • Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface except when used as a stacking port.
PAGE 791
• Enable root guard on a port or port-channel interface. INTERFACE mode or INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode spanning-tree {0 | mstp | rstp | pvst} rootguard – 0: enables root guard on an STP-enabled port assigned to instance 0. – mstp: enables root guard on an MSTP-enabled port. – rstp: enables root guard on an RSTP-enabled port. – pvst: enables root guard on a PVST-enabled port.
PAGE 792
STP Loop Guard STP loop guard is supported only on the platform. The STP loop guard feature provides protection against Layer 2 forwarding loops (STP loops) caused by a hardware failure, such as a cable failure or an interface fault. When a cable or interface fails, a participating STP link may become unidirectional (STP requires links to be bidirectional) and an STP port does not receive BPDUs. When an STP blocking port does not receive BPDUs, it transitions to a Forwarding state.
PAGE 793
Figure 108. STP Loop Guard Prevents Forwarding Loops Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. Dell Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: • Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
PAGE 794
• You cannot enable root guard and loop guard at the same time on an STP port. For example, if you configure loop guard on a port on which root guard is already configured, the following error message is displayed: % Error: RootGuard is configured. Cannot configure LoopGuard. • Enabling Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard at the same time on a port results in a port that remains in a blocking state and prevents traffic from flowing through it.
PAGE 795
System Time and Date 48 System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on the Z9000 platform. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. Network Time Protocol The network time protocol (NTP) synchronizes timekeeping among a set of distributed time servers and clients.
PAGE 796
time and adjust the local clock accordingly. In addition, the message includes information to calculate the expected timekeeping accuracy and reliability, as well as select the best from possibly several servers.
PAGE 797
Configure the Network Time Protocol Configuring NTP is a one-step process. • Enabling NTP Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring NTP Broadcasts • Setting the Hardware Clock with the Time Derived from NTP • Disabling NTP on an Interface • Configuring a Source IP Address for NTP Packets (optional) Enabling NTP NTP is disabled by default. To enable NTP, specify an NTP server to which the Dell Networking system synchronizes. To specify multiple servers, enter the command multiple times.
PAGE 798
ntp update-calendar Example of Updating the System Clock Relative to NTP R5/R8(conf)#do show calendar 06:31:02 UTC Mon Mar 13 1989 R5/R8(conf)#ntp update-calendar 1 R5/R8(conf)#do show calendar 06:31:26 UTC Mon Mar 13 1989 R5/R8(conf)#do show calendar 12:24:11 UTC Thu Mar 12 2009 Configuring NTP Broadcasts With Dell Networking OS, you can receive broadcasts of time information. You can set interfaces within the system to receive NTP information through broadcast.
PAGE 799
– For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. – For a loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number between 0 and 16383. – For a port channel interface, enter the keyword lag then a number from 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale. – For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet then the slot/port information. – For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 800
4. Configure an NTP server. CONFIGURATION mode ntp server ip-address [key keyid] [prefer] [version number] Configure the IP address of a server and the following optional parameters: • key keyid: configure a text string as the key exchanged between the NTP server and the client. • prefer: enter the keyword prefer to set this NTP server as the preferred server. • version number: enter a number as the NTP version. The range is from 1 to 3.
PAGE 801
NOTE: • Leap Indicator (sys.leap, peer.leap, pkt.leap) — This is a two-bit code warning of an impending leap second to be inserted in the NTP time scale. The bits are set before 23:59 on the day of insertion and reset after 00:00 on the following day. This causes the number of seconds (rollover interval) in the day of insertion to be increased or decreased by one.
PAGE 802
• Setting Recurring Daylight Saving Time Setting the Time and Date for the Switch Hardware Clock To set the time and date for the switch hardware clock, use the following command. • Set the hardware clock to the current time and date. EXEC Privilege mode calendar set time month day year – time: enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; for example, 17:15:00 is 5:15 pm. – month: enter the name of one of the 12 months in English.
PAGE 803
To set the clock timezone, use the following command. • Set the clock to the appropriate timezone. CONFIGURATION mode clock timezone timezone-name offset – timezone-name: enter the name of the timezone. Do not use spaces. – offset: enter one of the following: * a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours in addition to UTC for the timezone. * a minus sign (-) then a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours.
PAGE 804
– offset: (OPTIONAL) enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
PAGE 805
– end-year: Enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. – end-time: Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. – offset: (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
PAGE 806
PAGE 807
Tunneling 49 Tunneling is supported on the Z9000 platform. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, OSPFv2, and OSPFv3 are also supported. ICMP error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported. Configuring a Tunnel Configuring a tunnel is supported on the Z9000 platform. You can configure a tunnel in IPv6 mode, IPv6IP mode, and IPIP mode.
PAGE 808
ipv6 address 2::1/64 tunnel destination 90.1.1.1 tunnel source 60.1.1.1 tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 3 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.
PAGE 809
Configuring the ip and ipv6 unnumbered Configuring the tunnel interface is supported on the Z9000 platform. You can configure the tunnel in ip unnumbered and ipv6 unnumbered command. To configure the tunnel interface to operate without a unique explicit ip/ ipv6 address, select the interface from which the tunnel will borrow its address. The following sample configuration shows the IP unnumbered command: Dell(conf-if-te-0/0)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 20.1.1.
PAGE 810
tunnel mode ipip decapsulate-any no shutdown Configuring the tunnel source anylocal Configuring a tunnel source anylocal is supported on the Z9000 platform. The anylocal argument can be used in place of the ip address or interface, but only with multipoint receive-only mode tunnels.
PAGE 811
Upgrade Procedures 50 To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell Networking OS Release Notes. Get Help with Upgrades Direct any questions or concerns about the Dell Networking OS upgrade procedures to the Dell Technical Support Center. You can reach Technical Support: • On the web: http://support.dell.
PAGE 812
PAGE 813
Virtual LANs (VLANs) 51 Virtual LANs (VLANs) are supported on the Z9000 platform. VLANs are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
PAGE 814
By default, VLAN 1 is the Default VLAN. To change that designation, use the default vlan-id command in CONFIGURATION mode. You cannot delete the Default VLAN. NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN. To assign an IP address to a VLAN that is currently the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and assign it to be the Default VLAN. For more information about assigning IP addresses, refer to Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN. • Untagged interfaces must be part of a VLAN.
PAGE 815
information is preserved as the frame moves through the network. The following example shows the structure of a frame with a tag header. The VLAN ID is inserted in the tag header. Figure 110. Tagged Frame Format The tag header contains some key information that Dell Networking OS uses: • The VLAN protocol identifier identifies the frame as tagged according to the IEEE 802.1Q specifications (2 bytes). • Tag control information (TCI) includes the VLAN ID (2 bytes total).
PAGE 816
• Configure a port-based VLAN (if the VLAN-ID is different from the Default VLAN ID) and enter INTERFACE VLAN mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id To activate the VLAN, after you create a VLAN, assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to the VLAN. Example of Verifying a Port-Based VLAN To view the configured VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 817
The following example shows the steps to add a tagged interface (in this case, port channel 1) to VLAN 4. To view the interface’s status. Interface (po 1) is tagged and in VLAN 2 and 3, use the show vlan command. In a port-based VLAN, use the tagged command to add the interface to another VLAN. The show vlan command output displays the interface’s (po 1) changed status. Except for hybrid ports, only a tagged interface can be a member of multiple VLANs.
PAGE 818
Moving Untagged Interfaces To move untagged interfaces from the Default VLAN to another VLAN, use the following commands. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode of the VLAN to which you want to assign the interface. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 2. Configure an interface as untagged. INTERFACE mode untagged interface This command is available only in VLAN interfaces.
PAGE 819
4 Dell# Active T U Gi 3/1 Gi 3/2 The only way to remove an interface from the Default VLAN is to place the interface in Default mode by using the no switchport command in INTERFACE mode. Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN VLANs are a Layer 2 feature. For two physical interfaces on different VLANs to communicate, you must assign an IP address to the VLANs to route traffic between the two interfaces.
PAGE 820
To configure a port so that it can be a member of an untagged and tagged VLANs, use the following commands. 1. Remove any Layer 2 or Layer 3 configurations from the interface. INTERFACE mode 2. Configure the interface for Hybrid mode. INTERFACE mode portmode hybrid 3. Configure the interface for Switchport mode. INTERFACE mode switchport 4. Add the interface to a tagged or untagged VLAN.
PAGE 821
Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) 52 Virtual link trunking (VLT) is supported on the Z9000 platform. Overview VLT allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology.
PAGE 822
Figure 111. VLT on Switches VLT on Core Switches You can also deploy VLT on core switches. Uplinks from servers to the access layer and from access layer to the aggregation layer are bundled in LAG groups with end-to-end Layer 2 multipathing. This set up requires “horizontal” stacking at the access layer and VLT at the aggregation layer such that all the uplinks from servers to access and access to aggregation are in Active-Active Load Sharing mode.
PAGE 823
Figure 112. Enhanced VLT VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches. • VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the vitality of VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. • VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches. Both ends must be on 10G or 40G interfaces.
PAGE 824
Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember • VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. • If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT. Refer to Configure Rapid Spanning Tree. • Dell Networking strongly recommends that the VLTi (VLT interconnect) be a static LAG and that you disable LACP on the VLTi.
PAGE 825
• In a scenario where one hundred hosts are connected to a Peer1 on a non-VLT domain and traffic flows through Peer1 to Peer2; when you move these hosts from a non-VLT domain to a VLT domain and send ARP requests to Peer1, only half of these ARP requests reach Peer1, while the remaining half reach Peer2 (beacuse of LAG hashing). The reason for this behavior is that Peer1 ignores the ARP requests that it receives on VLTi (ICL) and updates only the ARP requests that it receives on the local VLT.
PAGE 826
– The system automatically includes the required VLANs in VLTi. You do not need to manually select VLANs. – VLT peer switches operate as separate chassis with independent control and data planes for devices attached to non-VLT ports. – Port-channel link aggregation (LAG) across the ports in the VLT interconnect is required; individual ports are not supported. Dell Networking strongly recommends configuring a static LAG for VLTi.
PAGE 827
– The chassis backup link does not carry control plane information or data traffic. Its use is restricted to health checks only. • Virtual link trunks (VLTs) between access devices and VLT peer switches – To connect servers and access switches with VLT peer switches, you use a VLT port channel, as shown in Overview. Up to 48 port-channels are supported; up to eight member links are supported in each port channel between the VLT domain and an access device.
PAGE 828
• Software features supported on VLT physical ports – In a VLT domain, the following software features are supported on VLT physical ports: 802.1p, LLDP, flow control, port monitoring, and jumbo frames. • Software features not supported with VLT – In a VLT domain, the following software features are supported on non-VLT ports: 802.1x, , DHCP snooping, FRRP, IPv6 dynamic routing, ingress and egress QOS.
PAGE 829
MAC address is selected as the Primary Peer. You can configure another peer as the Primary Peer using the VLT domain domain-id role priority priority-value command. If the VLTi link fails, the status of the remote VLT Primary Peer is checked using the backup link. If the remote VLT Primary Peer is available, the Secondary Peer disables all VLT ports to prevent loops.
PAGE 830
VLT and IGMP Snooping When configuring IGMP Snooping with VLT, ensure the configurations on both sides of the VLT trunk are identical to get the same behavior on both sides of the trunk. When you configure IGMP snooping on a VLT node, the dynamically learned groups and multicast router ports are automatically learned on the VLT peer node. VLT IPv6 VLT IPv6 is supported on the Z9000 platform.
PAGE 831
Figure 113. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
PAGE 832
To route traffic to and from the multicast source and receiver, enable PIM on the L3 side connected to the PIM router using the ip pim sparse-mode command. Each VLT peer runs its own PIM protocol independently of other VLT peers. To ensure the PIM protocol states or multicast routing information base (MRIB) on the VLT peers are synced, if the incoming interface (IIF) and outgoing interface (OIF) are Spanned, the multicast route table is synced between the VLT peers.
PAGE 833
Layer 3 on the other node. Configuration mismatches are logged in the syslog and display in the show vlt mismatch command output. If you enable VLT unicast routing, the following actions occur: • L3 routing is enabled on any new IP address / IPv6 address configured for a VLAN interface that is up. • L3 routing is enabled on any VLAN with an admin state of up. NOTE: If the CAM is full, do not enable peer-routing. NOTE: The peer routing and peer-routing-timeout is applicable for both IPv6/ IPv4.
PAGE 834
• Optimal VLTi forwarding — Only one copy of the incoming multicast traffic is sent on the VLTi for routing or forwarding to any orphan ports, rather than forwarding all the routed copies. Important Points to Remember • You cannot configure a VLT node as a rendezvous point (RP), but any PIM-SM compatible VLT node can serve as a designated router (DR). • You can only use one spanned VLAN from a PIM-enabled VLT node to an external neighboring PIM router.
PAGE 835
NOTE: ARP entries learned on non-VLT, non-spanned VLANs are not synced with VLT peers. RSTP Configuration RSTP is supported in a VLT domain. Before you configure VLT on peer switches, configure RSTP in the network. RSTP is required for initial loop prevention during the VLT startup phase. You may also use RSTP for loop prevention in the network outside of the VLT port channel. For information about how to configure RSTP, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Run RSTP on both VLT peer switches.
PAGE 836
VLT switch determines the RSTP roles and states on VLT ports and ensures that the VLT interconnect link is never blocked. In the case of a primary VLT switch failure, the secondary switch starts sending BPDUs with its own bridge ID and inherits all the port states from the last synchronization with the primary switch. An access device never detects the change in primary/secondary roles and does not see it as a topology change.
PAGE 837
Configuring a VLT Interconnect To configure a VLT interconnect, follow these steps. 1. Configure the port channel for the VLT interconnect on a VLT switch and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command as described in Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2.
PAGE 838
Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain To enable VLT and create a VLT domain, use the following steps. 1. Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The domain ID range is from 1 to 1000. Configure the same domain ID on the peer switch to allow for common peering. VLT uses the domain ID to automatically create a VLT MAC address for the domain.
PAGE 839
Configuring a VLT Backup Link To configure a VLT backup link, use the following command. 1. Specify the management interface to be used for the backup link through an out-of-band management network. CONFIGURATION mode interface managementethernet slot/ port Enter the slot (0-1) and the port (0). 2. Configure an IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) and mask (/x) on the interface.
PAGE 840
Reconfiguring the Default VLT Settings (Optional) To reconfigure the default VLT settings, use the following commands. 1. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 2. (Optional) After you configure the VLT domain on each peer switch on both sides of the interconnect trunk, by default, Dell Networking OS elects a primary and secondary VLT peer device.
PAGE 841
Connecting a VLT Domain to an Attached Access Device (Switch or Server) To connect a VLT domain to an attached access device, use the following commands. On a VLT peer switch: To connect to an attached device, configure the same port channel ID number on each peer switch in the VLT domain. 1. Configure the same port channel to be used to connect to an attached device and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number 2. Remove an IP address from the interface.
PAGE 842
Configuring a VLT VLAN Peer-Down (Optional) To configure a VLT VLAN peer-down, use the following commands. 1. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 2. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number The range is from 1 to 128. 3.
PAGE 843
3. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 4. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number The range is from 1 to 128. 5. Configure the IP address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer to be used as the endpoint of the VLT backup link for sending out-of-band hello messages.
PAGE 844
8. Configure enhanced VLT. Configure the port channel to be used for the VLT interconnect on a VLT switch and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command in the Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. 9. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode switchport 10.
PAGE 845
VLT Sample Configuration To review a sample VLT configuration setup, study these steps. 1. Configure the VLT domain with the same ID in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. VLT DOMAIN mode vlt domain domain id 2. Configure the VLTi between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. 3. You can configure LACP/static LAG between the peer units (not shown).
PAGE 846
13. Verify that the VLT LAG is running in both VLT peer units. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface Example of Configuring VLT In the following sample VLT configuration steps, VLT peer 1 is , VLT peer 2 is , and the ToR is S60-1. NOTE: If you use a third-party ToR unit, Dell Networking recommends using static LAGs with VLT peers to avoid potential problems if you reboot the VLT peers. Configure the VLT domain with the same ID in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2.
PAGE 847
Configure the VLT links between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the Top of Rack unit. In the following example, port Te 0/40 in VLT peer 1 is connected to Te 0/48 of TOR and port Te 0/18 in VLT peer 2 is connected to Te 0/50 of TOR. 1. Configure the static LAG/LACP between the ports connected from VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the Top of Rack unit. 2. Configure the VLT peer link port channel id in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. 3.
PAGE 848
no ip address switchport no shutdown s60-1# s60-1#show interfaces port-channel 100 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel L LAG 100 Mode L2 Status up Uptime 03:33:48 s60-1# Ports Te 0/48 (Up) Te 0/50 (Up) Verify VLT is up. Verify that the VLTi (ICL) link, backup link connectivity (heartbeat status), and VLT peer link (peer chassis) are all up.
PAGE 849
Figure 114. eVLT Configuration Example eVLT Configuration Step Examples In Domain 1, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1#configure Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-1)# channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/8-9 Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#vlt domain 1000 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.16.130.
PAGE 850
Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.16.130.12 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# system-mac mac-address 00:0a:00:0a:00:0a Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# unit-id 1 Configure eVLT on Peer 2. Domain_1_Peer2(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# switchport Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 2.
PAGE 851
Configure eVLT on Peer 4. Domain_2_Peer4(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# switchport Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 4.
PAGE 852
VLT_Peer2(conf-if-vl-4001)#exit VLT_Peer2(conf)#end Verifying a VLT Configuration To monitor the operation or verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the following show commands on the primary and secondary VLT switches. • Display information on backup link operation. EXEC mode • show vlt backup-link Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch.
PAGE 853
Example of the show vlt backup-link Command Example of the show vlt brief Command Example of the show vlt detail Command Example of the show vlt role Command Example of the show running-config vlt Command Example of the show vlt statistics Command Example of the show spanning-tree rstp Command Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.
PAGE 854
Version: Local System MAC address: Remote System MAC address: Configured System MAC address: Remote system version: Delay-Restore timer: 5(1) 00:01:e8:8a:e7:e7 00:01:e8:8a:e9:70 00:0a:0a:01:01:0a 5(1) 90 seconds Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------100 127 Peer LAG Id ----------100 2 Local Status Peer Status Active VLANs ------------ ----------- ------------UP UP 10, 20, 30 UP UP 20, 30 Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------2 100 Peer LAG Id ----------127 100 Local
PAGE 855
ICL Hello's Received: 98 Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt statistics VLT Statistics ---------------HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: ICL Hello's Sent: ICL Hello's Received: 994 978 89 89 The bold section displays the RSTP state of port channels in the VLT domain. Port channel 100 is used in the VLT interconnect trunk (VLTi) to connect to VLT peer2. Port channels 110, 111, and 120 are used to connect to access switches or servers (vlt).
PAGE 856
Additional VLT Sample Configurations To configure VLT, configure a backup link and interconnect trunk, create a VLT domain, configure a backup link and interconnect trunk, and connect the peer switches in a VLT domain to an attached access device (switch or server). Review the following examples of VLT configurations. Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 1) Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link and interconnect trunk (VLTi).
PAGE 857
Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 2) Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#vlt domain 999 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.11.206.23 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#exit Configure the backup link. Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-ma-0/0)#ip address 10.11.206.
PAGE 858
no ip address switchport channel-member fortyGigE 1/18,22 no shutdown Troubleshooting VLT To help troubleshoot different VLT issues that may occur, use the following information. NOTE: For information on VLT Failure mode timing and its impact, contact your Dell Networking representative. Table 55.
PAGE 859
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take System MAC mismatch A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated. A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated. Verify that the unit ID of VLT peers is not the same on both units and that the MAC address is the same on both units. Unit ID mismatch The VLT peer does not boot up. The VLTi is forced to a down state. The VLT peer does not boot up. The VLTi is forced to a down state.
PAGE 860
Specifying VLT Nodes in a PVLAN You can configure VLT peer nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN) on the Z9000 platform. VLT enables redundancy without the implementation of Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), and provides a loop-free network with optimal bandwidth utilization. Because the VLT LAG interfaces are terminated on two different nodes, PVLAN configuration of VLT VLANs and VLT LAGs are symmetrical and identical on both the VLT peers. PVLANs provide Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same VLAN.
PAGE 861
not validated if you associate an ICL to a PVLAN. Similarly, if you dissociate an ICL from a PVLAN, although the PVLAN parity exists, ICL is removed from that PVLAN. Association of VLTi as a Member of a PVLAN If a VLAN is configured as a non-VLT VLAN on both the peers, the VLTi link is made a member of that VLAN if the VLTi link is configured as a PVLAN or normal VLAN on both the peers.
PAGE 862
PVLAN Operations When a VLT Peer is Restarted When the VLT peer node is rebooted, the VLAN membership of the VLTi link is preserved and when the peer node comes back online, a verification is performed with the newly received PVLAN configuration from the peer. If any differences are identified, the VLTi link is either added or removed from the VLAN. When the peer node restarts and returns online, all the PVLAN configurations are exchanged across the peers.
PAGE 863
VLT LAG Mode PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 Peer1 Peer2 Promiscuo us Trunk Primary Primary Yes No Trunk Access Primary Secondary No No Promiscuo us Promiscuo us Primary Primary Yes Yes Promiscuo us Access Primary Secondary No No Promiscuo us Promiscuo us Primary Primary Yes Yes - Secondary (Community) - Secondary (Isolated) No No Secondary (Community) Secondary (Isolated) No No • • Yes Yes Access Promiscuo us Acc
PAGE 864
VLT LAG Mode PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 Peer1 Peer2 Access Access Secondary (Community) Secondary (Community) No No - Primary VLAN Y - Primary VLAN X No No Promiscuo us Access Primary Secondary No No Trunk Access Primary/Normal Secondary No No Configuring a VLT VLAN or LAG in a PVLAN You can configure the VLT peers or nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN).
PAGE 865
4. Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown 5. To configure the VLT interconnect, repeat Steps 1–4 on the VLT peer switch. 6. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 7. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number The range is from 1 to 128. 8.
PAGE 866
5. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode for the VLAN to which you want to assign the PVLAN interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 6. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 7. To obtain maximum VLT resiliency, configure the PVLAN IDs and mappings to be identical on both the VLT peer nodes. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to primary. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode primary 8. Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN.
PAGE 867
proxy ARP. For example, consider a sample topology in which VLAN 100 is configured on two VLT nodes, node 1 and node 2. ICL link is not configured between the two VLT nodes. Assume that the VLAN 100 IP address in node 1 is 10.1.1.1/24 and VLAN 100 IP address in node 2 is 20.1.1.2/24. In this case, if the ARP request for 20.1.1.1 reaches node 1, node 1 will not perform the ARP request for 20.1.1.2. Proxy ARP is supported only for the IP address belongs to the received interface IP network.
PAGE 868
VLT Nodes as Rendezvous Points for Multicast Resiliency You can configure virtual link trunking (VLT) peer nodes as rendezvous points (RPs) in a Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) domain on the Z9000 platform. PIM uses a VLT node as the RP to distribute multicast traffic to a multicast group. Messages to join the multicast group (Join messages) and data are sent towards the RP, so that receivers can discover who the senders are and begin receiving traffic destined for the multicast group.
PAGE 869
VLT Proxy Gateway 53 This chapter describes the VLT Proxy Gateway feature. Proxy Gateway in VLT Domains The functionality to configure the proxy gateway in VLT domains is supported on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, Z9000 platforms. You can configure a proxy gateway in VLT domains. A proxy gateway enables you to locally route the packets that are destined to L3 endpoint of the other VLT domain.
PAGE 870
When the routing table across DCs is not symmetrical, there is a possibility of a routing miss by a DC that do not have the route for the L3 traffic. Since routing protocols will enabled and both the DC’s comes in same subnet there will not be route asymmetry dynamically. But if static route is configured on one DC and not on the other, it will result is asymmetry. Proxy routing can still be achieved locally by configuring a static route or default gateway.
PAGE 871
8. LLDP port channel interface can’t be changed to legacy lag when proxy gateway is enabled. 9.“vlt-peer-mac transmit” is recommended only for square VLT without any diagonal links. 10. VRRP and IPv6 routing is not supported now. 11. With the existing hardware capabilities, only 512 my_station_tcam entries can be supported. 12. PVLAN not supported 13. After VM Motion, it’s expected that VM Host will send GARP in term, host previous VLT Domain will have mac movement points to newer VLT Domain 14.
PAGE 872
• There are only a couple of MACs for each unit to be transmitted so that all current active MACs can definitely be carried on the newly defined TLV. • This TLV is recognizable only by FTOS devices with this feature support. Other device will ignore this field and should still be able to process other standard TLVs. The LLDP organizational TLV passes local DA information to peer VLT domain devices so they can act as proxy gateway.
PAGE 873
2. Trace route across VLT domains may show extra hops. 3. IP route symmetry must be maintained across the VLT domains. Assume if the route to a destination is not available at C2, though the packet hits the MY_STATION_TCAM and routing is enabled for that VLAN, if there is no entry for that prefix in the routing table it will dropped to CPU. By default, all route miss packets are given to CPU. To avoid this static entry must be configured. 4.
PAGE 874
8. Packet duplication – Assume exclude-vlan (say VLAN 10) is configured on C2/D2 for C1’s MAC. If packets for VLAN 10 with C1’s MAC get a hit at C2, they will be switched to both D2 (via ICL) and C1 via inter DC link. This could lead to packet duplication. So, if C1’s MAC is learnt at C2 then the packet would not have flooded (to D2) and only switched to C1 and thus avoided packet duplication. Configuring an LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway You can configure a proxy gateway in VLT domains.
PAGE 875
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 54 Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is supported on the Z9000 platform. VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN). The MASTER router is chosen from the virtual routers by an election process and forwards packets sent to the next hop IP address.
PAGE 876
Figure 115. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. VRRP Implementation Within a single VRRP group, up to 12 virtual IP addresses are supported.
PAGE 877
decreases based on the dynamics of the network, the advertisement intervals may increase or decrease accordingly. CAUTION: Increasing the advertisement interval increases the VRRP Master dead interval, resulting in an increased failover time for Master/Backup election. Take caution when increasing the advertisement interval, as the increased dead interval may cause packets to be dropped during that switch-over time. Table 57.
PAGE 878
INTERFACE mode vrrp-group vrid The VRID range is from 1 to 255. • NOTE: The interface must already have a primary IP address defined and be enabled, as shown in the second example. Delete a VRRP group. INTERFACE mode no vrrp-group vrid Example of Configuring VRRP Example of Verifying the VRRP Configuration Dell(conf)#int gi 1/1 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)# Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.10.10.
PAGE 879
• If you configure multiple VRRP groups on an interface, only one of the VRRP Groups can contain the interface primary or secondary IP address. Configuring a Virtual IP Address To configure a virtual IP address, use the following commands. 1. Configure a VRRP group. INTERFACE mode vrrp-group vrrp-id The VRID range is from 1 to 255. 2. Configure virtual IP addresses for this VRID. INTERFACE -VRID mode virtual-address ip-address1 [...ip-address12] The range is up to 12 addresses.
PAGE 880
00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.2 10.10.10.3 10.10.10.10 Authentication: (none) -----------------GigabitEthernet 1/2, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.2.1 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.10.2.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 27, Gratuitous ARP sent: 2 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.2.2 10.10.2.
PAGE 881
Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 601, Gratuitous ARP sent: 2 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.2.2 10.10.2.3 Authentication: (none) Dell(conf)# Configuring VRRP Authentication Simple authentication of VRRP packets ensures that only trusted routers participate in VRRP processes. When you enable authentication, Dell Networking OS includes the password in its VRRP transmission.
PAGE 882
Because preempt is enabled by default, disable the preempt function with the following command. • Prevent any BACKUP router with a higher priority from becoming the MASTER router. INTERFACE-VRID mode no preempt Example of Disabling Preempt Example of Verifying Preempt is Disabled Re-enable preempt by entering the preempt command. When you enable preempt, it does not display in the show commands, because it is a default setting.
PAGE 883
Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#show conf ! vrrp-group 111 advertise-interval 10 authentication-type simple 7 387a7f2df5969da4 no preempt priority 255 virtual-address 10.10.10.1 virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 virtual-address 10.10.10.10 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)# Track an Interface or Object You can set Dell Networking OS to monitor the state of any interface according to the virtual group.
PAGE 884
Tracking an Interface To track an interface, use the following commands. NOTE: The sum of all the costs for all tracked interfaces must be less than the configured priority of the VRRP group. • Monitor an interface and, optionally, set a value to be subtracted from the interface’s VRRP group priority. INTERFACE-VRID mode track interface [priority-cost cost] The cost range is from 1 to 254. • The default is 10.
PAGE 885
Dell#show track Track 2 IPv6 route 2040::/64 metric threshold Metric threshold is Up (STATIC/0/0) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 Metric threshold down 255 up 254 First-hop interface is GigabitEthernet 13/2 Tracked by: VRRP GigabitEthernet 7/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 3 IPv6 route 2050::/64 reachability Reachability is Up (STATIC) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 First-hop interface is GigabitEthernet 13/2 Tracked by: VRRP GigabitEthernet 7/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Dell#show vrrp -----------------GigabitEthernet 7/30, IPv6
PAGE 886
NOTE: When you reload a node that contains VRRP configuration and is enabled for VLT, Dell Networking recommends that you configure the reload timer by using the vrrp delay reload command to ensure that VRRP is functional. Otherwise, when you reload a VLT node configured for VRRP, the local destination address is not seen on the reloaded node causing suboptimal routing. Set the delay timer on individual interfaces. The delay timer is supported on all physical interfaces, VLANs, and LAGs.
PAGE 887
Figure 116. VRRP for IPv4 Topology Example of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2 Example of Configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3 R2(conf)#int gi 2/31 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip address 10.1.1.
PAGE 888
virtual-address 10.1.1.3 no shutdown R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------GigabitEthernet 2/31, VRID: 99, Net: 10.1.1.1 State: Master, Priority: 200, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 817, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:63 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.3 Authentication: (none) R2# Router 3 R3(conf)#int gi 3/21 R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)#ip address 10.1.1.
PAGE 889
Figure 117. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface. The VRRPv3 group becomes active as soon as you configure the link local address.
PAGE 890
Although R2 and R3 have the same default, priority (100), R2 is elected master in the VRRPv3 group because the GigE 0/0 interface has a higher IPv6 address than the GigE 1/0 interface on R3.
PAGE 891
VRRP in a VRF Configuration The following example shows how to enable VRRP operation in a VRF virtualized network for the following scenarios. • Multiple VRFs on physical interfaces running VRRP. • Multiple VRFs on VLAN interfaces running VRRP. To view a VRRP in a VRF configuration, use the show commands. VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Scenario The following example shows how to enable VRRP in a non-VLAN.
PAGE 892
Figure 118. VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Example Example of Configuring VRRP in a VRF on Switch-1 (Non-VLAN) Example of Configuring VRRP in a VRF on Switch-2 (Non-VLAN Configuration) Switch-1 S1(conf)#ip vrf default-vrf 0 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 12/1 S1(conf-if-gi-12/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-gi-12/1)#ip address 10.10.1.
PAGE 893
S1(conf-if-gi-12/2)#no shutdown ! S1(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 12/3 S1(conf-if-gi-12/3)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-3 S1(conf-if-gi-12/3)#ip address 20.1.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-gi-12/3)#vrrp-group 15 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S1(conf-if-gi-12/3-vrid-105)#priority 255 S1(conf-if-gi-12/3-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.
PAGE 894
associated with each VLAN are configured on the provider edge (PE) router in the point-of-presence (POP).
PAGE 895
S2(conf-if-vl-100)#tagged gigabitethernet 12/4 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 1 will be 177. S2(conf-if-vl-100-vrid-101)#priority 255 S2(conf-if-vl-100-vrid-101)#virtual-address 10.10.1.2 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#no shutdown ! S2(conf-if-gi-12/4)#interface vlan 200 S2(conf-if-vl-200)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-2 S2(conf-if-vl-200)#ip address 10.10.1.
PAGE 896
192.168.0.
PAGE 897
Z-Series Debugging and Diagnostics 55 This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the Z-Series platform. Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels: • Level 0 — Level 0 diagnostics check for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, they verify the identification registers of the components on the board.
PAGE 898
Running Offline Diagnostics To run offline diagnostics, use the following command. 1. Place the unit in the offline state. EXEC Privilege mode offline stack-unit For normal system operation, reload the system after you issue the offline command. NOTE: You cannot enter the command on a stacking unit. NOTE: The system reboots when the offline diagnostics completes. This is an automatic process in default mode.
PAGE 899
Taking a Z-Series Stack Unit Offline Verifying the Offline/Online Status of a Z-Series Stack Unit Running Offline Diagnostics on a Z-Series Standalone Unit Verifying the Offline/Online Diagnostics of a Z-Series Standalone Unit Running offline Diagnostics in Debug Mode Example of the show diag information Command Example of the show diag stack-unit Command Dell#offline stack-unit 0 Warning - offline of stack unit will bring down all the protocols and the unit will be operationally down, except for running Di
PAGE 900
- advisable to shut directly connected ports Proceed with Diags [confirm yes/no]: yes 00:03:35: %S50N:1 %DIAGAGT-6-DA_DIAG_STARTED: Starting diags on stack unit 1 00:03:35 : Approximate time to complete these Diags ... 6 Min S50N#00:09:32 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReportSU-0.txt 00:09:37: %S50N:0 %DIAGAGT-6-DA_DIAG_DONE: Diags finished on stack unit 0 Diags completed...
PAGE 901
Test 4.000 - Psu Fan Speed Monitor Test ............................. PASS diagS3240GetPsuOnStatus[580]: ERROR: PSU-1 is not present... diagS3240PsuFanSpeedMonitorTest[378]: ERROR: Getting PSU -1 power status failed.. Test 4.001 - Psu Fan Speed Monitor Test ............................. FAIL Test 4 - Psu Fan Speed Monitor Test ................................ FAIL + TEST - 5 PSU [0] Source Type --> AC Test 5.000 - Psu Source type test ...................................
PAGE 902
Current diag status: Unit diags are done. Duration of execution (Total): 8 min 11 sec. Diagonostic test results located: /f10/flash/TestReport-SU-0.
PAGE 903
show hardware Commands These commands display information from a hardware subcomponent and from hardware-based feature tables. NOTE: Use the show hardware commands only under the guidance of the Dell Networking Technical Assistance Center (TAC). • • View internal interface status of the stack-unit CPU port which connects to the external management interface.
PAGE 904
• View the tables from the bShell through the CLI without going into the bShell. show hardware stack-unit {0-11} unit {0-1} table-dump {table name} The Z9000 supports thirty–two 40G ports or one-hundred twenty–eight 10G ports on four port-pipes, which are also called units. The system displays internal port numbers, not the external port numbers that you see.
PAGE 905
Internal Unit User Ports Port Number from 0 to 31 on Unit 0 User Ports from 32 to 63 on Unit 1 User Ports from 64 to 95 on Unit 2 User Ports No User No User from 96 to Ports on Unit Ports on Unit 127 on Unit 3 4 5 26 25 57 89 121 Internal Internal 27 26 58 90 122 Internal Internal 28 27 59 91 123 Internal Internal 29 28 60 92 124 Internal Internal 30 29 61 93 125 Internal Internal 31 30 62 94 126 Internal Internal 32 31 63 95 127 Internal Internal 33 Int
PAGE 906
• If directly adjacent cards are not normal temperature, suspect a genuine overheating condition. • If directly adjacent cards are normal temperature, suspect a faulty sensor. When the system detects a genuine over-temperature condition, it powers off the card. To recognize this condition, look for the system messages shown in the following example.
PAGE 907
Table 59. SNMP Traps and OIDs OID String OID Name Description chSysPortXfpRecvPower OID to display the receiving power of the connected optics. chSysPortXfpTxPower OID to display the transmitting power of the connected optics. chSysPortXfpRecvTemp OID to display the Temperature of the connected optics. Receiving power .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.5.1.6 Transmitting power .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.5.1.8 Temperature .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.5.1.
PAGE 908
3. Front-End Link — Output queues going from the FP to the front-end PHY. All ports support eight queues — four for data traffic and four for control traffic. All eight queues are tunable. Physical memory is organized into cells of 128 bytes. The cells are organized into two buffer pools — dedicated buffer and dynamic buffer. • Dedicated buffer — is reserved memory that cannot be used by other interfaces on the same ASIC or by other queues on the same interface.
PAGE 909
Buffer Tuning Points Decide to Tune Buffers Dell Networking recommends exercising caution when configuring any non-default buffer settings, as tuning can significantly affect system performance. The default values work for most cases. As a guideline, consider tuning buffers if traffic is very bursty (and coming from several interfaces). In this case: • Reduce the dedicated buffer on all queues/interfaces. • Increase the dynamic buffer on all interfaces.
PAGE 910
• buffer-profile fp fsqueue Define a buffer profile for the CSF queues. CONFIGURATION mode • buffer-profile csf csqueue Change the dedicated buffers on a physical 1G interface. BUFFER PROFILE mode • buffer dedicated Change the maximum number of dynamic buffers an interface can request. BUFFER PROFILE mode • buffer dynamic Change the number of packet-pointers per queue. BUFFER PROFILE mode • buffer packet-pointers Apply the buffer profile to a line card.
PAGE 911
correctly returns to the default values, but the profile name remains. Remove it from the show bufferprofile [detail | summary] command output by entering the no buffer [fp-uplink |csf] linecard port-set buffer-policy command from CONFIGURATION mode and the no bufferpolicy command from INTERFACE mode. Display the allocations for any buffer profile using the show commands, shown in the following examples.
PAGE 912
6 7 3.00 3.00 256 256 Sample Buffer Profile Configuration The two general types of network environments are sustained data transfers and voice/data. Dell Networking recommends a single-queue approach for data transfers, as shown in the following example.
PAGE 913
Displaying Drop Counters To display drop counters, use the following commands. • Identify which stack unit, port pipe, and port is experiencing internal drops. • show hardware stack-unit 0–7 drops [unit 0–5 [port 0–41]] Display drop counters.
PAGE 914
queue basis. The objective is to see whether CPU-bound traffic is internal (so-called party bus or IPC traffic) or network control traffic, which the CPU must process. • Display input and output statistics on the party bus, which carries inter-process communication traffic between CPUs.
PAGE 915
Displaying Stack Member Counters The show hardware stack-unit 0–7 {counters | details | port-stats [detail] | register} command displays internal receive and transmit statistics, based on the selected command option. • Displaying Stack Unit Counters RIPC4.ge0 RUC.ge0 RDBGC0.ge0 RDBGC1.ge0 RDBGC5.ge0 RDBGC7.ge0 GR64.ge0 GR127.ge0 GR255.ge0 GRPKT.ge0 GRBYT.ge0 GRMCA.ge0 GRBCA.ge0 GT64.ge0 GT127.ge0 GT255.ge0 GT511.ge0 GTPKT.ge0 GTBCA.ge0 GTBYT.ge0 RUC.cpu0 TDBGC6.
PAGE 916
Mini Core Dumps Dell Networking OS supports mini core dumps for kernel crashes. The mini core dump applies to Master units. Kernel mini core dumps are always enabled. The mini core dumps contain the stack space and some other very minimal information that can be used to debug a crash. These files are small files and are written into flash until space is exhausted. When the flash is full, the write process is stopped. A mini core dump contains critical information in the event of a crash.
PAGE 917
You can use the capture-duration timer and the packet-count counter at the same time. The TCP dump stops when the first of the thresholds are met. That means that even if the duration timer is 9000 seconds, if the maximum file count parameter is met first, the dumps stop. • Enable a TCP dump for CPU bound traffic.
PAGE 918
PAGE 919
Standards Compliance 56 This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS), Dell Networking OS also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website.
PAGE 920
MTU 9,252 bytes RFC and I-D Compliance Dell Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 60. General Internet Protocols RFC# Full Name S-Series 768 User Datagram Protocol 7.6.
PAGE 921
General IPv4 Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general IPv4 protocols. Table 61. General IPv4 Protocols RFC# Full Name S-Series 791 Internet Protocol 7.6.1 792 Internet Control Message Protocol 7.6.1 826 An Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol 7.6.1 1027 Using ARP to Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways 7.6.1 1035 DOMAIN NAMES - IMPLEMENTATION AND SPECIFICATION (client) 7.6.
PAGE 922
General IPv6 Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general IPv6 protocols. Table 62. General IPv6 Protocols RFC# Full Name S-Series 1886 DNS Extensions to support IP version 6 7.8.1 1981 (Partial) Path MTU Discovery for IP version 6 7.8.1 2460 Internet Protocol, Version 6 (IPv6) Specification 7.8.1 2462 (Partial) IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration 7.8.1 2464 Transmission of IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks 7.8.
PAGE 923
RFC# Full Name S-Series/Z-Series 2545 Use of BGP-4 Multiprotocol Extensions for IPv6 Inter-Domain Routing 2796 BGP Route Reflection: An Alternative to Full Mesh Internal BGP (IBGP) 2842 Capabilities Advertisement with BGP-4 7.8.1 2858 Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4 7.8.1 2918 Route Refresh Capability for BGP-4 7.8.1 3065 Autonomous System Confederations for BGP 7.8.1 4360 BGP Extended Communities Attribute 7.8.1 4893 BGP Support for Four-octet AS Number Space 7.8.
PAGE 924
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for IS-IS protocol. Table 65.
PAGE 925
Multicast The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for Multicast protocol. Table 67. Multicast RFC# Full Name S-Series 1112 Host Extensions for IP Multicasting 7.8.1 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, 7.8.1 Version 2 2710 Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) for IPv6 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol, 7.8.
PAGE 926
RFC# Full Name S4810 S4820T Z9000 Management of TCP/IPbased internets 1157 A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 7.6.1 1212 Concise MIB Definitions 7.6.1 1215 A Convention for Defining 7.6.1 Traps for use with the SNMP 1493 Definitions of Managed 7.6.1 Objects for Bridges [except for the dot1dTpLearnedEntryDisc ards object] 1724 RIP Version 2 MIB Extension 1850 OSPF Version 2 7.6.1 Management Information Base 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2 7.6.
PAGE 927
RFC# Full Name S4810 S4820T Z9000 Digital Hierarchy (SONET/ SDH) Interface Type 2570 Introduction and Applicability Statements for Internet Standard Management Framework 7.6.1 2571 An Architecture for 7.6.1 Describing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Management Frameworks 2572 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 2574 User-based Security 7.6.
PAGE 928
RFC# Full Name S4810 S4820T Z9000 radiusAuthClientMalforme dAccessResponses radiusAuthClientUnknown Types radiusAuthClientPacketsD ropped 3635 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernetlike Interface Types 7.6.1 2674 Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic Classes, Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions 7.6.1 2787 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 7.6.
PAGE 929
RFC# Full Name S4810 3418 Management Information 7.6.1 Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 3434 Remote Monitoring MIB Extensions for High Capacity Alarms, HighCapacity Alarm Table (64 bits) 7.6.1 3580 IEEE 802.1X Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) Usage Guidelines 7.6.1 3815 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS), Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) 4001 Textual Conventions for Internet Network Addresses 8.3.
PAGE 930
RFC# Full Name S4810 S4820T Z9000 9.2(0.0) 9.2(0.0) 9.2(0.0) 9.2.(0.0) 9.2.(0.0) isisISAdjTable isisISAdjAreaAddrTable isisISAdjIPAddrTable isisISAdjProtSuppTable draft-ietf-netmodinterfaces-cfg-03 Defines a YANG data model for the configuration of network interfaces. Used in the Programmatic Interface RESTAPI feature. IEEE 802.1AB Management Information 7.7.1 Base module for LLDP configuration, statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. IEEE 802.
PAGE 931
RFC# Full Name S4810 FORCE10-FIB-MIB Force10 CIDR Multipath Routes MIB (The IP Forwarding Table provides information that you can use to determine the egress port of an IP packet and troubleshoot an IP reachability issue.
PAGE 932
RFC# Full Name S4810 FORCE10-TRAPALARM-MIB Force10 Trap Alarm MIB 7.6.1 S4820T Z9000 MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.aspx You also can obtain a list of selected MIBs and their OIDs at the following URL: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/Main/Login.aspx Some pages of iSupport require a login. To request an iSupport account, go to: https://www.